Basic Operation

Section

This document is the instruction manual for the ARIETTA 70

Diagnostic Ultrasound System.
This manual, along with the Instruction for use Section, should
be read before operating the instrument.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Basic Operation Section |1
 Thank you for purchasing the Hitachi, Ltd. ARIETTA 70 Diagnostic Ultrasound System; we truly
appreciate your business.
Before using the instrument, please read this manual.
Be sure to keep this manual for future reference.

Note that the diagnostic ultrasound system windows referred to in this instruction manual might differ
from the windows actually displayed.

This manual is applicable to ARIETTA 70, ARIETTA 70a, ARIETTA S70, ARIETTA S70a, ARIETTA V70 and
ARIETTA V70a.

The word, ARIETTA 70 in the manual is deemed to be ARIETTA 70, ARIETTA 70a, ARIETTA S70, ARIETTA
S70a, ARIETTA V70 and ARIETTA V70a, if the case may be.

Trademarks and Registered Trademarks

Microsoft, Windows, Microsoft Excel, and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Adobe, Acrobat, and Reader are trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United
States and other countries.
The company name, product names, and logo of McAfee, in both English and Japanese, are trademarks or registered
trademarks of McAfee, Inc. or its affiliated companies.
Linux is a trademark or registered trademark of Mr. Linus Torvalds in Japan, and other countries.
Real-time Tissue Elastography, Real-time Virtual Sonography, HI REZ, and HdTHI are registered trademarks in Japan of
Hitachi, Ltd..
VS-FlexGrid Pro copyright© 1999-2000 Videosoft Corporation.
This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
Other company names, product names and system names mentioned in the instruction manual of this instrument
may be the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective organizations. This document omits symbols such
as ™ and ®.
©Hitachi, Ltd. 2013,2018. All rights reserved.

Precautions concerning the software incorporated into this instrument.

Regarding the software installed in this instrument, the following actions are prohibited.
(1) Reselling, assigning, or transferring the software itself
(2) Reverse engineering, reverse compiling, or reverse assembling
(3) Modification, alteration or translation
(4) Creating copies or duplicates
(5) Leasing to third parties

2 | Basic Operation Section ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Symbols Used in this Document
The terms below are used as follows in this manual, to prevent hazards and injuries to operators and
patients. The severity of a hazard and injury that can occur when failing to observe the displayed safety
information is indicated in four levels: Danger, Warning, Caution, and Note.

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in death or
serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in death or serious
injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury.
Indicates a strong request concerning an item that must be observed in order to prevent
damage or deterioration of the equipment, and also to ensure that it is used efficiently.

The safety symbols have the meanings shown below.

This kind of symbol means attention is required.

This symbol means the noted action is prohibited.

This symbol means the noted action is required.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Basic Operation Section |3
ARIETTA70 Diagnostic Ultrasound System

ARIETTA70 Diagnostic Ultrasound System

This instrument is intended to be used by doctors and other qualified persons, who have a basic
knowledge of an ultrasound system and have received the required training, for performing
tomography and hemodynamics diagnosis of blood flow in the human body.
However, this instrument cannot be used for performing ultrasound examination of the eyes. The
acoustic power from this instrument exceeds the upper ophthalmologic limit indicated in the U.S. FDA
standards.

I) Precautions concerning the use and management of this instrument

 Only doctors and other qualified persons are allowed to perform operations for diagnostic purpose.

 Scan only for the minimum length of time necessary for the diagnosis, and at the lowest possible output.

 Do not disassemble, repair, or modify the instrument or its optional equipment without our permission.
Repair of the instrument will be carried out by our certified personnel. Allow us to handle any repair work.

NOTE: Disassembly means the use of tools to remove the casing or other parts.

NOTE: Modification means attachment of parts or devices to this instrument other than those specified by
the manufacturer. Replacement of a power cable counts as modification.

 Installation of the instrument and any optional equipment (mounting and connecting using tools) will be
performed by our certified partners. Allow us to handle any repair work.

 Perform periodical cleaning and inspection of this instrument. For details, refer to “Procedures After
Instrument Use” in the separate “Instructions for Use”.

 In the event of an instrument malfunction, immediately remove the probe from the patient and stop using
the instrument. Provide appropriate medical treatment immediately if the patient's condition is abnormal.
Perform the required measures for the instrument as described in “Message” in the separate “Instructions
for Use”. Be sure to contact our office if the abnormality is not described in “Message”.

II) Precautions on Instrument Installation

This instrument is medical electrical equipment intended for use in hospitals, research institutions
and similar facilities. Install this instrument as described below.

 Install the instrument according to the instructions given in “Setup Before Use” in the separate
“Instructions for Use”.

 Install it in an environment that satisfies the conditions described in “Ambient Conditions” in the separate
“Instructions for Use”.

 Install the instrument in an environment where electromagnetic compatibility can be maintained in

accordance with “Precautions for Maintaining Electromagnetic Compatibility” and “Guidelines for
Electromagnetic Compatibility” in the separate “Instructions for Use”.

NOTE: The electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is ability of device to function satisfactorily in its
electromagnetic environment without introducing intolerable electromagnetic disturbance to anything in
that environment.

4 | Basic Operation Section ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Classification of the ARIETTA70

Classification of the ARIETTA70

 Protection against electric shock: Class I · ME equipment

 Protection against electric shock (applied part): Type BF applied part

– Probes and scanner

Refer to the diagram below (or the probe and scanner diagrams) and table below for applied parts and
parts handled as such.

B C A

connector

connector
C A

The above is an example of probes for surface and intraoperative use. Below are examples of Endocavity
probes.

Applicable part of
body Applied part Parts treated as applied parts B - C length

Surface of body Ultrasonic irradiation area (D) A to B 100 cm

Intraoperative Ultrasonic irradiation area (D) A to B 20 cm

Endocavity A to C A to C —

– ECG, PCG, Pulse

Applied part can be used up to 2 m from each cable's electrodes (refer to image below).

e.g.: ECG
2 meters
ECG electrodes
connector

ECG patient lead

 Protection against electric shock (Defibrillation-proof applied parts): Not suitable

 Protection against harmful ingress of water or particulate matter

– equipment: IPX0 (Ordinary equipment)

– Probe applied part: IPX7 (Watertight equipment)

 Suitability for use in an oxygen rich environment: Not suitable

 Method (s) of sterilization: Not suitable for sterilization/disinfection with medicinal solution, gas or
radiation.

 Mode of operation: Continuous operation

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Basic Operation Section |5
Classification of the ARIETTA70

6 | Basic Operation Section ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Table of Contents

1 Basic controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1-1 Display screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

1-2 Operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

1-2-1 Touch panel menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
1-2-2 Virtual keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

1-3 Log in/log out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

1-4 Switching Probes and Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

1-5 Adjusting ultrasound output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

1-5-1 Ultrasound output limit for fetal observation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

1-6 Entering comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

1-6-1 Choose word and input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
1-6-2 Moving and Deleting Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
1-6-3 Registering a Word in the Menu Format to a User Dictionary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
1-6-4 Registering a Word in the List Format to a User Dictionary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
1-6-5 Registering a Word From the System Dictionary in the User Dictionary . . . . . . . .37
1-6-6 Editing a Word in the User Dictionary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

1-7 Displaying Body Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

2 Entering Patient Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

2-1 Entry method for patient data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

2-2 Entering patient data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

2-2-1 Entry Items on the ID screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
2-2-2 Series/ Image Information entry items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

2-3 Searching patient data that is on the instrument hard disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

2-4 Loading patient data from HIS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

2-4-1 Searching the Worklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

2-5 Loading Patient Data from the Card (Patient’s Registration Card) . . . . . . . . .55
2-5-1 Displaying Patient Data Read from the Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
2-5-2 Searching the Worklist Using Patient Data Read from a Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 |7
 2-6 Importing CSV Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
2-6-1 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

2-7 ID screen settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

2-7-1 Setting item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

3 Image display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
3-1 B mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
3-1-1 Display B mode image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

3-2 M mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

3-2-1 Displaying M Mode Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
3-2-2 FAM (Free Angular M) mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

3-3 Color Flow Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74

3-3-1 Displaying Color Flow Mode Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

3-4 D Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

3-4-1 Displaying the PW waveform. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
3-4-2 Displaying the CW Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
3-4-3 Displaying with Dual Gate Doppler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83

3-5 TDI Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

3-6 Adjust the image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

3-6-1 Adjusting the gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
3-6-2 Auto Optimizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
3-6-3 Switching frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
3-6-4 Setting the focus position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
3-6-5 Switching the display area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
3-6-6 Rotating and inverting images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
3-6-7 Inverting Doppler waveform and colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
3-6-8 Zooming the image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
3-6-9 Switching observation modes (THI, Coded) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
3-6-10 Setting image quality filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
3-6-11 Compound mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
3-6-12 Trapezoidal scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
3-6-13 Adjusting the direction of the ultrasound beam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

3-7 Dynamic Slow-motion Display (D.S.D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

3-7-1 Displaying in D.S.D (ECG) mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
3-7-2 Displaying in D.S.D (Time) Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

8| ©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14
 3-8 Panorama Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

3-9 Modes that can be displayed for specific probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

3-9-1 360° Radial display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
3-9-2 Brachytherapy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
3-9-3 Displaying in real time biplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
3-9-4 OMNI Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
3-9-5 Displaying the assist line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

3-10 Picture in Picture (PinP) mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

3-10-1 Displaying the PinP window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

3-11 Displaying the puncture guideline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

3-11-1 Displaying Multiple Puncture Guide Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

3-12 Needle Emphasis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

3-12-1 Setting Graphic Line 1 as Perpendicular to the Puncture Guideline as
Possible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
3-12-2 Adjusting the Graphic Line 2 Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
3-12-3 Reversing the Angle of Graphic Line 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

3-13 Physiological signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

3-13-1 Displaying the physiological signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
3-13-2 Detecting the R-R interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
3-13-3 Displaying the heart rate stability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

3-14 Cine Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

3-14-1 Making the frozen image active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
3-14-2 Switching with dual screen display of the tomographic image and sweep
image (M mode or D mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
3-14-3 Playing Back Cine Memory Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
3-14-4 Continuous playback of tomographic images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

4 Outputting images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

4-1 Outputting images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
4-1-1 Notes regarding image records and storage media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

4-2 Saving a still image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

4-2-1 Change storage format and storage area of still image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

4-3 Saving moving images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

4-3-1 Store set time videos: Post Time/Post ECG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
4-3-2 The moving image is saved going back to the time set: Pre Time/Pre ECG. . . . 147

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 |9
 4-3-3 Store videos at arbitrary time: Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
4-3-4 Store videos at arbitrary range after freeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

4-4 Recording on a HD Video Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

4-4-1 Recording on a HD Video Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
4-4-2 Playing back images stored in the HDD of the HD Video Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . 152
4-4-3 Copying, deleting or protecting data stored to the internal HDD of
the HD Video Recorder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

4-5 To print an image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

5 Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
5-1 Playback Image Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

5-2 Displaying a selected image: Full Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

5-2-1 Displaying Images from Thumbnails. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
5-2-2 Chooses and displays an image from tile display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

5-3 Comparing with real-time images: Comparison Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

5-4 Searching for images: Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

5-4-1 Searching for CT and MR Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

5-5 Configuring Data Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

5-5-1 Setting item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

5-6 Editing Moving Images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

5-7 Copying Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

5-7-1 When the Archive message is displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

5-8 Deleting Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

5-9 Saving Images in PC Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

5-10 Transferring Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

5-10-1 Transferring Images in Video Clip Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

5-11 Printing Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

5-11-1 Configuring Printer Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

5-12 Writing onto a CD-R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

5-13 Confirming Free Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

5-14 Activate the Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

5-14-1 Starting analysis from the Find/Time View screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

10 | ©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14
 5-14-2 Starting analysis from the thumbnail area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

6 Exiting an Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

6-1 Finish examination/begin next examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
6-1-1 List of network connection operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
6-1-2 If there is no network connection, or if there is only a connection to a Worklist
server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
6-1-3 If there is a connection to an MPPS server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

7 Patient information management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

7-1 Loading patient information from USB media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

7-2 Writing patient information from the instrument hard disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

7-3 Deleting patient information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

7-4 To Revise Patient Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

8 Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
8-1 Types of menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

8-2 Direct switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

8-3 Function menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

8-3-1 Function menu: B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
8-3-2 Function menu: M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
8-3-3 Function menu: D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
8-3-4 Function menu: Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
8-3-5 Function menu: DSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
8-3-6 Function menu: FAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
8-3-7 Function menu: Physio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
8-3-8 Function menu: PinP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
8-3-9 Function menu: Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
8-3-10 Function menu: Find/Tile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 | 11
 9 Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
9-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

9-2 System Presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

9-2-1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
9-2-2 Monitor/Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
9-2-3 Trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
9-2-4 Filing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
9-2-5 Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
9-2-6 DICOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

9-3 Application presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

9-3-1 Registering an application to a probe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
9-3-2 Adding and deleting applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
9-3-3 Changing application names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
9-3-4 Initializing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
9-3-5 Sorting applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
9-3-6 Editing application parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
9-3-7 Application parameter: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
9-3-8 Application parameter: B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
9-3-9 Application Parameters: M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
9-3-10 Application Parameters: Doppler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
9-3-11 Application parameter: Color. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
9-3-12 Application Parameters: Tissue Dop.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
9-3-13 Application Parameters: Body Mark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
9-3-14 Application Parameters: EyeballEF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

9-4 QSS Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

9-4-1 Editing QSS presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
9-4-2 QSS parameters: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
9-4-3 QSS parameters: B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
9-4-4 QSS parameters: M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
9-4-5 QSS parameters: Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
9-4-6 QSS parameters: Doppler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
9-4-7 QSS parameters: Tissue Dop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
9-4-8 QSS parameters: Physiology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

9-5 Region Data Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

9-5-1 Copying diagnostic field settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
9-5-2 Changing diagnostic field settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
9-5-3 Initialize the diagnostic field settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

12 | ©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14
 9-5-4 Editing the diagnostic field settings parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
9-5-5 Diagnostic Field Settings Parameters: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
9-5-6 Diagnostic Field Settings Parameters: B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
9-5-7 Diagnostic Field Settings Parameters: Doppler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
9-5-8 Diagnostic Field Settings Parameters: Color. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
9-5-9 Diagnostic Field Settings Parameters: Tissue Dop.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
9-5-10 Diagnostic Field Settings Parameters: Body Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
9-5-11 Diagnostic Field Settings Parameters: Annotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
9-5-12 Diagnostic Field Settings Parameters: Physiology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
9-5-13 Diagnostic Field Settings Parameters: PinP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

9-6 Input Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

9-6-1 Copy/Paste Input Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
9-6-2 Initializing Input Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
9-6-3 Changing preset names of input devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
9-6-4 Assigning functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

9-7 Color Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

9-7-1 Editing the contents of a Color Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
9-7-2 Combining, Copying, and Pasting Color Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
9-7-3 Initializing Color Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
9-7-4 Changing color map names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

9-8 Filing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

9-8-1 Editing Filing Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
9-8-2 Combining, Copying, and Pasting Filings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
9-8-3 Initializing Filings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
9-8-4 Changing Filing Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
9-8-5 Filing: Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

9-9 Dictionary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

9-10 Loading Presets and Backing-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

9-10-1 Importing Chosen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
9-10-2 Exporting Designated Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
9-10-3 Create a Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
9-10-4 Restoring Backup Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

9-11 User management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

9-11-1 Configuring the User Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
9-11-2 Registering a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
9-11-3 Editing a registered user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
9-11-4 Outputting user list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 | 13
14 | ©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14
 1 Basic controls

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Basic controls | 15
Display screen

1-1 Display screen

The examination screen is displayed as follows.

(5)

(1)

(2)
(6)
(3) (7)
(4)

Figure 1: Examination screen formation

(1) Saved images of patient under examination are displayed as thumbnails.

The following information will be displayed in the four corners of the thumbnail.

A C A: Separate Image Icon

B: Device Icon
C: image number (series number-serial number)
D: Stored Image Format

B D
(2) Display user buttons of thumbnail area, tile display and search screen.
(3) Display menu such as showing images on a full screen and analysis screen.
(4) Displays system information.

A B C D E F G
A: File processing progress bar
B: Recording status of HD Video Recorder
C: Media connection/insertion status and amount used

D: [Pointer] Key (rotation) functions ( : with functions. : without functions.)

E: Function of track ball (active functions with enclosure)
F: Various types of status
Icons from the left indicate magnetic sensor status, wireless network connection status and wired network
connection status
NOTE: For details on magnetic sensor status, refer to the separate "Real-time Virtual Sonography" volume.

Wireless network connection status: Connected, not connected, (no icon) device not recognized

Wired network connection status: Connected, not yet connected, error

16 | Basic controls ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Display screen

G: Current date and time

(5) Displays ultrasound images. Patient information, image information, and other content are displayed.
(6) This display auxiliary information for operation procedures.
(7) The Acquisition progress bar and the cine memory capacity bar appear (only in CHI mode).

Information displayed on the ultrasound image

(1) (2) (3) (4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8) (9) (10) (11) (12)

(1) Counter
(2) Upper section: Hospital name, lower section: Inspector and/or doctor name
(3) Patient data
(4) Current date and time: When frozen, the time and date of the initial freeze will be displayed.
(5) MI value, TI value, ultrasound output, frame rate, cine memory number
(6) Orientation marks, steering marks
(7) Focus marks
(8) Preset name
(9) Probe name
(10) Frequency (B, M), display depth, B gain value, dynamic range (B,M), PRF/transmission/reception frequency (CF,
D), CF gain value
(11) Upper section: Sample volume value
Lower section: Angle correction value (during angle correction), sample volume depth (during PW), or reference
mark depth (during CW)
(12) Display frame number/total number of frames (when in freeze display)
PW waveform and CW waveform cutoff frequency (displayed in B/D mode)

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Basic controls | 17
Operation panel

1-2 Operation panel

1
2

3
11
4
5

6 12

13

14
7
15

9
16

10

Figure 2: Operation panel diagram

1: [Power] key 7: [Review] key 11: [TGC] knob

2: [Acoustic Power] key 8: [User2] key 12: Multi Rotary encoder
3: [New Patient] key 9: [User1] key 13: [User3] key
4: [End Exam.] key 10: Trackball 14: [User4] key
5: [Probe/Preset] key 15: [PAN ZOOM/DEPTH] key
6: [Menu] key 16: [FOCUS/VELOCITY] Paddle switch

18 | Basic controls ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Operation panel

Figure 3: Operation panel (trackball area)

[Measurement] key [Single] key

[UNDO] key [Dual] key

[Caliper] key [Update] key

[Cine Search] key [Auto-optimizer] key

[Trackball Function] key

[REC] key
This document refers to this as the [T.B.F.] key.

[HI Zoom] key [Print] key

[Pointer] key [Store] key

[Body Mark] key [Freeze/B Gain] key

[Enter] key

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Basic controls | 19
Operation panel

1-2-1 Touch panel menu

I)
II)

III)

Figure 4: Touch panel display example

The touch panel menu can be categorized into the following three.

I) Direct switches

You can activate the functions when you select it. Switch the page with the bottom .

II) Menu tab

III) Function menu

The function menu can be brought together with the tab. Switch the page with the upper right
.

The following types are in the function menu.

DSD Refresh Starts the function when selected.

Starts the function when selected. It switches to Off if another function in the same group
Post (Time) Pre(Time)
is selected.

On Off

HI-REZ HI REZ You can switch to On and Off, by pressing the buttons.

HDD

Color Map Store Media Displays expanded menus when selected.

(B/M)

100.0

Sweep Speed(M) Select left/right to choose values or options.

20 | Basic controls ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Operation panel

Use the multi-lottery encoder from the following function menu and select a numerical value and/or a
choice.

100.0 100.0 100.0

Sweep Speed Sweep Speed

Sweep Speed
(M) (M) (M)

Figure 5: A function menu that uses the bottom multi-lottery encoders from the menu

100.0
Move the multi-lottery encoder up and down and select a numerical value and/or a choice.
Sweep Speed
(M)

100.0
Move the multi-lottery encoder from right to left and select a numerical value and/or a choice.
Sweep Speed
(M)

100.0
Rotate the multi-lottery encoder and select a numerical value and/or a choice.
Sweep Speed
(M)

Reference Please refer to the bottom for the allotment of each menu.
information Assigning functions → p.333

1-2-2 Virtual keyboard

Input characters directly. In addition, you can display in combination with the annotation menu at the
time of comment input.

The time of comment input Time of character input on the ID screen, preset screen,
login screen, Find screen or Report screen.
Select [Exit] on the upper part of the screen to set it on do
not display if it is not necessary.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Basic controls | 21
Log in/log out

1-3 Log in/log out

Log in and log out controls will be necessary if the device user verification is set.

Preliminary check To logoff, assign [Log Off] to the function menu.

 Log in.
a Enter the user name the User name field in
the login screen.

b Enter current Password.

c Select [OK].

 Select [Log Off] from the function menu to log off.

 The login screen is displayed.

 Changing password.
a Press [Password] on the log in screen.

b Input user name.

c Input current password.

d Enter a new password between 4 to 16

alphanumeric characters.

e Input the new password one more time.

f Select [OK].

 Return to the log in screen.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

information Configuring the User Authentication → p.357

22 | Basic controls ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Switching Probes and Applications

1-4 Switching Probes and Applications

Use the steps below to switch probes and applications for use during the examination.

Refer to the separate "Instruction for use Section" about ways to connect probe.
NOTE: Operation procedures differ with the [Probe << Preset Link] setting on the touch panel. Check this setting
before making any changes.

 If [Probe << Preset Link] on the touch panel is Off.

a Press [Probe/Preset] key.

b Select Probe on the touch panel.

 The above steps switches the probe in the current application.

 When [Probe << Preset Link] on the touch panel is On.

Both the application and probe are selected at the same time.

a Press [Probe/Preset] key.

b Select Application on the touch panel.

 Switches to the selected application and the probe for that row.

NOTE: Select [All Preset] to switch to an application not shown on the touch panel.
All registered applications will be displayed.

References Registering an application to a probe → p.273

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Basic controls | 23
Adjusting ultrasound output

1-5 Adjusting ultrasound output

Use the steps below to adjust ultrasound output to suit operating mode.

ALARA is the principle of a condition of restraining the acoustic output level to as low a level as deemed
possible and inspecting the maximum amount of diagnostic information. This is the same principle as
used with ionizing radiation.
Diagnostic ultrasound system are said to be harmless and non-invasive. However, since it exposes the
human body to ultrasonic waves, it is not completely safe. Therefore make examinations using the
lowest possible ultrasound output.
For more details on ultrasonic output, refer to the separate Safety and Prep Guide.

 Turn the [Acoustic Power] key to adjust ultrasound output.

 You can adjust output in 5% increments. In CW mode, you can adjust output in three stages: L, M
and H.

A lower acoustic power setting will reduce the surface emperature of the probe tip.

24 | Basic controls ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Adjusting ultrasound output

1-5-1 Ultrasound output limit for fetal observation

Use the steps below to temporarily cancel the ultrasound output limit for fetal observation.

This instrument limits ultrasound output in accordance with IEC 60601-2-37 Ed.2 (2007) when it is used
for fetal observation. The MI upper limit and the TI upper limit are both below 1.0.
General, Obstetrics, Obstetrics TV, Fetal, Heart, Obstetrics 3D and/or STIC applications are used for
ultrasonic output limit. This limit can be temporarily suspended using the follow steps.

Canceling ultrasound wave output restrictions

1 Select [Power Limit Override] from touch panel System tab.

 The message “Keep the acoustic output level as low as possible. Refer to ALARA recommendations
in the Instruction Manual.” will be displayed.

2 Select [OK].
 The AP value is highlighted.

The limit is suspended until the [New Patient] key is pressed. To limit ultrasound output, again select
[Power Limit Override] on the touch panel.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Basic controls | 25
Entering comments

1-6 Entering comments

Use the steps below to enter text on the screen.

Preliminary check Specify preset ([Preset Setup > Region]) Annotation to use user dictionaries and other resources.

A virtual keyboard (touch panel) is used for key input. You can also use the optional alphanumeric
keyboard (EU-9165).

1 Push the [Pointer] key.

2 Use the trackball to move the pointer to the insertion point.

In case of changing pointer orientation
Rotate [Pointer] key.

3 Input key.
A virtual keyboard will be displayed when you select KB tab and/or Anno.+KB tab.

KB tab Anno.+KB tab

In case of changing character size

Select [A A] from the virtual keyboard. “Small” displays normal size text, “Middle” displays text that is
2.25 times as large and “Large” displays text that is four times as large. The selected text size becomes
effective from the cursor location where a text size was selected.

26 | Basic controls ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Entering comments

4 Press the [Enter] key. Alternatively, select [Enter] from the virtual keyboard.
In case of deleting comment entered after removing freeze
Configure the presets ([Preset Setup > Region > Annotation]) to “Erase” under Comment Auto Delete.

In case of displaying comment entered after removing freeze

Configure the presets ([Preset Setup > Region > Annotation]) to “Remain” under Comment Auto Delete.

Touch panel menus related to entering comments

Menu Description
Set Home Sets the home position of the text cursor.
Home Moves to the home position of the text cursor.
Replace Toggles between the replace and insert modes.
Enter Confirms the entered text. Or revision.
Delete Deletes a word.
Delete Last Deleting the last word used.
Move Cursor Switches the choice of words.
Dictionary Switch the user screen.
Prev/Next Switches the page of the displayed menu.

Reference Diagnostic Field Settings Parameters: Annotation → p.326

information

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Basic controls | 27
Entering comments

1-6-1 Choose word and input

Select a word registered in a user or system dictionary from the Annotation menu to enter it.
NOTE: Turn on Search Words in the Common tab in the preset ([Preset Setup > Region > Annotation])

1 Push the [Pointer] key.

2 Use the trackball to move the pointer to the insertion point.

3 Select the Anno.+KB tab or the Anno tab.

Using the first or the first two characters in a word to search for a word
Use Anno.+KB tab on the virtual keyboard or the optional alphanumeric keyboard (EU-9165) to enter
the first or the first two characters in the word you want to display.

Anno.+KB tab Anno. tab

4 Select a word.
 The selected word is displayed on the image.

Reference Dictionary → p.348

information

28 | Basic controls ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Entering comments

1-6-2 Moving and Deleting Words

Prior confirmation In order to select and replace words, you must set up classes of words in advance.
Select [Registration] in the preset ([Preset Setup > Dictionary]) to set it in the List tab in the User
Dictionary screen that opens.

 Move word.
a Put the text cursor inside a word.

b Press the [UNDO] key.

 The word will be highlighted. c Move word with track ball and press [UNDO]
key.

 Delete word.
a Put the text cursor inside a word.

b Switch to Anno. tab or Anno.+KB tab.

c Select [Delete].
 The word will be deleted.

[Delete] of (Anno.+KB tab) on the touch panel

 Deleting the last word used.

a Select [Delete Last] on the touch panel.

 Deleting just one character.

a Set [Replace] on the touch panel to “Off”.

b Put the text cursor right after the character.

c Select [BS] on the touch panel.

 Replacing a word.
a Set [Replace] on the touch panel to “On”. multi rotary encoder to select the word to

b Move the pointer to the word you want to replace.

replace. Alternatively, use the [Move Cursor]  The word is highlighted.

c Select the word to replace from the touch

panel.
 The word is replaced.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Basic controls | 29
Entering comments

 Replacing a word with a word in the same class.

Replace a word displayed on the screen with a word on the touch panel that is in the same class.

Select [Registration] in the preset ([Preset Setup > Dictionary]) and set the class in the List tab in the User
Dictionary screen that opens.

a Set [Replace] on the touch panel to “On”.

b Use the touch panel to select a word in the

same class as the word you want to replace.
 The word is replaced.

NOTE: The color of the class set in the preset appears on the touch panel.

NOTE: You cannot replace a word with a word of the same class if that word is from another dictionary.

NOTE: If multiple words of the same class as the word you want to replace are entered, you cannot replace the word.

 Using the keyboard to replace a word.

a Set [Replace] on the touch panel to “On”.

b Move the pointer to the word to replace.

Alternatively, use the [Move Cursor] multi
rotary encoder to select the word to replace.
 The word is highlighted.

c Use the keyboard to enter the character.

 The word is replaced.

30 | Basic controls ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Entering comments

 Inserting a character or a word.

a Set [Replace] to “Off” on the touch panel. rotary encoder to select the character or

b Move the character cursor in the word. word.

Alternatively, use the [Move Cursor] multi  The word is underlined.

c Use the keyboard to enter the character. You

can also select words on the touch panel.
 The character or word is inserted.

Reference Registering a Word in the List Format to a User Dictionary → p.34

information

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Basic controls | 31
Entering comments

1-6-3 Registering a Word in the Menu Format to a User Dictionary

This function allows you to register multiple words in succession. You can also check the list displayed
on the touch panel.

2 4 5 6 7

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select “Dictionary”.

3 Select [Registration].

4 Select a user dictionary to register from User Dictionary.

5 Select [Anno.] or [Anno.+KB].

6 Select the Menu tab.

7 Select the annotation button position you want to register.

8 Enter up to 8 characters or symbols and press the [Enter] key.

 The word is registered.

9 Select [Save] to save settings.

10 Select [Close] to return to the examination screen.

32 | Basic controls ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Entering comments

If the “Save changes to preset data?” message is displayed

Select [Yes] to store changes.

Select [No] to close preset screen without saving changes.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Basic controls | 33
Entering comments

1-6-4 Registering a Word in the List Format to a User Dictionary

Allows you to register multiple words in succession.

2 4 5 (A)

(A): Legend display

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select “Dictionary”.

3 Select [Registration].

4 Select a user dictionary to register from User Dictionary.

5 Select [Anno.] or [Anno.+KB].

6 Select the List tab.

7 Select the position you want to register and enter characters or symbols.
Class
Set the class of the word. Use to replace a word entered on the screen with a word on the touch panel
that is in the same class. The color of the specified class number is displayed at the top left of the
Annotation button. View the legend display to check the color of the class number.

Key
Enter the characters on the touch panel. Use this function for registering abbreviated text.

34 | Basic controls ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Entering comments

Word
Entries of words that contain up to 54 characters should be fully spelled out. When characters are
entered in Word only, Key displays the first 8 characters entered in Word.

8 Press the [Enter] key.

 The word is registered.

9 Select [Save] to save settings.

10 Select [Close] to return to the examination screen.

If the “Save changes to preset data?” message is displayed
Select [Yes] to store changes.

Select [No] to close preset screen without saving changes.

Reference Editing the Classes of Words → p.36

information

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Basic controls | 35
Entering comments

Editing the Classes of Words

This function configures the names of classes and their usage status.

1 Select in the Class row to display the class category list.

2 Select “Manage Class”.

 The dialog box shown below opens.

3 Change the class settings.

Changing the name of a class
Enter up to 8 characters in the Class Name field.

Changing the usage status of a class

Select the Classification button of a class.

 Enable: Displays the class in the class

category list.

 Disable: Does not display the class in the

class category list.

4 Select [OK] to close the dialog box.

36 | Basic controls ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Entering comments

1-6-5 Registering a Word From the System Dictionary in the User

Dictionary

2 4 5 7 8 6

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select “Dictionary”.

3 Select [Registration].

4 Select a user dictionary to register from User Dictionary.

5 Select [Anno.] or [Anno.+KB].

6 Select an area in the System Dictionary.

 The list displays words.

NOTE: System dictionary cannot be edited.

7 Select the Menu tab or the List tab.

8 Select annotation button or No. position you want to register.

9 Select a character or symbol in the System Dictionary.

 The word is registered.

10 Select [Save] to save settings.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Basic controls | 37
Entering comments

11 Select [Close] to return to the examination screen.

If the “Save changes to preset data?” message is displayed
Select [Yes] to store changes.

Select [No] to close preset screen without saving changes.

38 | Basic controls ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Entering comments

1-6-6 Editing a Word in the User Dictionary

 Deleting a registered reserved word.

Using the Menu tab

a Select the annotation button you want to

delete.

b You can also select [BS] or [Delete] on the

touch panel.

Using the List tab

a Select the word to delete from a key.

b Select [BS/Delete] from the keyboard.

c Select [Enter] from the keyboard.

 Moving the position of a registered word.

Using the Menu tab

a Select the word you want to move, then

press and hold the [Enter] key.

b Move the pointer to the word you wish to

move to and release the [Enter] key.
 The word is replaced.

Using the List tab

a Select the word you want to move, then

press and hold the [Enter] key.

b Move the pointer to the word you wish to

move to and release the [Enter]key.
 The word is replaced.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Basic controls | 39
Displaying Body Marks

1-7 Displaying Body Marks

Use the steps below to display schema of scanning cross-sections in the examination window.

 Display and hide body marks.

a Press the [Body Mark] key.

b Select [Body Mark] on the touch panel.

 The body mark will be displayed in case the [Body Mark] key is On. The body mark will not be
displayed in case it is Off.

 Change body mark.

a Press [Body Mark] key.

b Select the body mark from the function

menu.

 The selected body mark will be displayed.

 Move and rotate probe mark.

a Press [Body Mark] key.

b Move the probe position with track ball.

c Turn the [Pointer] key and rotate the

direction of the probe mark.

 Attach right left mark to body mark.

a Press [Body Mark] key.

b Select [L/R] from the touch panel.

 The [L/R] will be On and an L/R mark will be displayed on the body mark.

Put [L/R] on Off and the L/R mark of body mark will not be displayed.

 Rotate the fetus mark.

NOTE: Only a monotocous, horizontal fetal mark can be rotated.

a Press [Body Mark] key. In case of switching the rotation of the probe
mark and fetal mark
b Select a fetal body mark from the function
Press the [Enter] key and switch.
menu.

c Press [Enter] key.

d Turn the [Pointer] key and rotate the

direction of the fetal mark.

40 | Basic controls ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Displaying Body Marks

 Move the body mark display position

a Press the [Body Mark] key.

b Press [Location] again from the touch panel

to turn it On.
 A frame is displayed over the body mark.

c Use the trackball to move the frame and

press the [Enter] key.
In case of returning to previous position

Press the [UNDO] key.

d Press [Location] again from the touch panel

to turn it Off.
 The frame will be deleted and the body mark
position will be fixed.

Reference Please refer to the following for the body mark allocation methods.
information Application Parameters: Body Mark → p.287

Refer to the following for settings to inherit body marks and probe marks in an active image.
Diagnostic Field Settings Parameters: Body Mark → p.325

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Basic controls | 41
Displaying Body Marks

42 | Basic controls ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 2 Entering Patient
Information

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Entering Patient Information | 43
Entry method for patient data

2-1 Entry method for patient data

Enter patient data when starting an examination.

Patient data must be entered before the examination starts. Patient ID is required in the image storage,
transmission and measurement result report.
The following four methods are used to input patient information.

 Directly input into patient information screen.

 Search the instrument database.

 Search for patient data (Worklist) obtained from the HIS.

 Read from an ID card.

Optional software is required in the case of connecting to Worklist, MPPS server and DICOM SR server.
Refer to the separate "Instruction for use Section".
Use the virtual keyboard to enter patient data.

If you do not need the virtual keyboard, select [Exit] at the top of the screen to hide it.

44 | Entering Patient Information ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Entering patient data

2-2 Entering patient data

Use the steps below to enter patient data on the Patient Data screen.

Preliminary check To revise patient data for an existing patient, assign the [ID] to a direct switch or custom switch.

1 Press the [New Patient] key to begin a new examination. Select [ID] on the direct switch to
revise patient data.
 The ID screen is displayed.

Pressing the [New Patient] key displays the ID screen after the End Exam process is complete for the
current patient data.

2 Enter the patient data.

NOTE: Patient ID is required to save images.

When the ID of a patient who has already been examined is entered:

The message “This order is already performed. Do you want to perform an additional examination?” is
displayed.

 [Yes]: Performs the exam again without

updating the Study ID.

 [No]: The Study ID is updated.

3 Check Series/Image Information.

a Select [Series/Image].

b Check and edit Image Type items, etc.

c Select [OK].

4 Confirm patient data, select [OK] or press the [New Patient] key or the [B] key.
 Switches to the Analysis screen. The patient ID, patient name, and other information is displayed on
the Analysis screen.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

information

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Entering Patient Information | 45
Entering patient data

2-2-1 Entry Items on the ID screen

Patient information entry items include items that are shared between applications, and items that are
application-specific.
NOTE: Only alphanumeric characters can be entered.

Common items

Patient Information

Entry item name Input details

Patient ID Enter the patient ID.
If this is closed with no entry, it is displayed as “xDate_Time”. For example, 9:17:24 on February 8th,
2013 is displayed as “ x130208-091724”)
NOTE: Patient ID is required to save images.
Patient Name Enter the patient name.
Sex Select patient sex from Male, Female, Other or blank.
Birth Date Enter patient's birth date in the Gregorian calendar or Japanese calendar. For Japanese era format,
input the year after the letter Heisei: “H”, Showa: “S”, Taisho: “T”, Meiji: “M”, and then the birth date
is displayed in Western calendar.
Calendar entry is possible using the buttons on the right side of Birth Date.
Age Patient age is calculated from current date and Birth Date, and displayed.
The unit of the age is “D” for 6 days after birth or younger, “W” for 7 to 29 days after birth, “M” for
30 to 364 days after birth, and “Y” for 365 or older.
If the Age is entered directly, the entered birth date is erased.
Height Enter the patient height in cm, m or feet/inch. Use presets
([Preset Setup > SystemPreset > General]) Unit (Height) to change units.
Weight Enter the patient weight in either kg or pound. Use presets ([Preset Setup > SystemPreset >
General]) Unit (Weight) to change units.
Occupation Enter patient occupation.

46 | Entering Patient Information ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Entering patient data

Study Information/Series Information

Entry item name Input details

Procedure ID The examination ID obtained from the Worklist is displayed.
Accession Number The accession number obtained from the Worklist is displayed.
Study ID Displays the number of examinations that a patient received with the identical ID number.
The default value is “1”.
Study Description Examination content obtained from the Worklist is displayed.
Referring Physician Name of the physician performing the examination.
Select from the pull-down list or use the keyboard to enter the name.
Reporting Physician Name of the physician responsible for diagnosis.
Select from the pull-down list or use the keyboard to enter the name.
Sonographer Ultrasound examiner.
Select from the pull-down list or use the keyboard to enter the name.
Body Part Examined Select the body part you want to examine from the list.

Items other than in the list above can be added depending on the option of the ID Input field.

Application specific items

Application specific items can be changed in the ID Input field.

There are no DICOM tags corresponding to the following items (other than last menstrual date).

When selecting ID Obstetrics from ID Input field

Entry item name Input details

“LMP” Enter the last day of the menstrual period.
The gestational week and expected confinement date of birth are calculated and displayed.
“BBT” Enter the estimated date of ovulation.
The gestational week and expected confinement date of birth are calculated and displayed.
“EGA” Enter the last examination date and the corresponding gestational week.
The gestational week and expected confinement date of birth are calculated and displayed.
“EDC” Enter the expected delivery date.
The gestational week is calculated and displayed.
“GA” Enter the gestational week.
The expected confinement date birth is calculated and displayed.
GRAV Enter the number of pregnancies.
PARA Enter the number of births.
AB Enter the number of abortions and miscarriages.
ECTO Enter the number of ectopic pregnancies.
BMI This is calculated from height and body weight, and displayed.
NOTE: The value is not displayed on the screen during examination.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Entering Patient Information | 47
Entering patient data

Selecting ID Gynecology from the ID Input field

Input item name Input data

“LMP” Enter the last day of the menstrual period.
The menstrual cycle is calculated and displayed.
“BBT” Enter the estimated date of ovulation.
The menstrual cycle is calculated and displayed.
GRAV Enter the number of pregnancies.
PARA Enter the number of births.
AB Enter the number of abortions or miscarriages.
ECTO Enter the number of ectopic pregnancies.
BMI Calculated and displayed using height and weight data.
NOTE: The value will not show up on the screen during examination.

When selecting ID BSA from ID Input field

Entry item name Input details

BSA The body surface area is calculated by the calculation formula Dubois, Boyd or Shintani.
The body surface area is directly input for Key in.
• DuBois
Calculates the body surface area using the DuBois (DuBois) formula.
BSA = 0.007184 × H0.725 × W0.425
BSA:m2, H:cm, W:kg
• Boyd
Calculates the body surface area using the Boyd (Boyd) formula.
BSA = 0.0003207 × H0.3 × W(0.7285-0.0188 × logW)
BSA:m2, H:cm, W:kg
• Shintani
Calculates the body surface area using the Shintani (Shintani) formula.
BSA = 0.007358 × H0.725 × W0.425
BSA:m2, H:cm, W:kg
BMI This is calculated from height and weight, and displayed.
NOTE: The value is not displayed on the screen during examination.
Blood Pressure Enter the maximum blood pressure value on the left and the minimum blood pressure value
on the right.

When selecting ID Urology from ID Input field

Entry item name Input details

Serum PSA Enter in up to 4 characters.
BMI This is calculated from height and weight, and displayed.
NOTE: The value is not displayed on the screen during examination.

48 | Entering Patient Information ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Entering patient data

Selecting ID Name from the ID Input field

Entry item name Input details

Blood Pressure Enter the maximum blood pressure value on the left and the minimum blood pressure value
on the right.

When selecting ID BMI from ID Input field

Entry item name Input details

BMI This is calculated from height and weight, and displayed.
NOTE: The value is not displayed on the screen during examination.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Entering Patient Information | 49
Entering patient data

2-2-2 Series/ Image Information entry items

Performed Protocol Code Sequence

The examiner enters the examination region, and the method.

1 Select [Series/Image].

2 Select [Edit].

3 Add examination content.

When adding from scheduled items

a Select from the Scheduled Protocol Code

Sequence list.

b Select [Add].

When adding from items on the instrument

a Select from Built in System list.

b Select [Add].

When deleting unnecessary items

a Select from the Performed Protocol Code

Sequence list.

b Select [Delete].

4 Select [OK].

Series Information

Entry item name Input details

Laterality Select left or right of the examination region from the list.
Description Enter an explanation of the image, within 64 characters.

50 | Entering Patient Information ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Entering patient data

Image Information

Entry item name Input details

Image Type Select the image type from the list.
Patient Orientation Select anatomical orientation of the patient from the list.
Enter orientations of the patient as viewed from the side of the image, and then the
orientation from above, inserting a backslash in between.

Data Set

Entry item name Input details

Region Calibration Sets the addition of pixel composition elements. If this item is switched ON, region
information is added, regardless of the region information setting.
Full Attributes Sets constraints on tag information when recording and/or transferring images. If this is
ON, all information is added.

Contrast/Bolus

Entry item name Input details

Agent Enter in the name of contrast agent up to 64 characters.
Volume Enter the administered dose. Enter in the range 0 to 999.999.
Route Enter the administration method in up to 64 characters.
Total Dose Enter the full administered dose. Enter in the range 0 to 999.999.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Entering Patient Information | 51
Searching patient data that is on the instrument hard disk

2-3 Searching patient data that is on the instrument

hard disk

1 Press the [New Patient] key to display the ID screen.

2 Select [Search] on the ID screen.

 All patient data stored on the hard disk is displayed.

3 Enter a search key for the Patient ID or Patient Name.

Fuzzy search
Enter “*” before or after the text string.

4 Set up [Search].
 The search results are displayed.

5 Select the patient.

a Use the trackball to select the name of the
patient.

b Select [OK].

 The selected information is displayed on ID screen.

52 | Entering Patient Information ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Loading patient data from HIS

2-4 Loading patient data from HIS

Load patient data from Hospital Information System (HIS) to the instrument hard disk and display it in a
list.

Preliminary check Settings for the network with the HIS server are necessary for loading patient data from the HIS. Consult
the hospital network administrator for details.
Use [SetUp] in the ID screen to specify search key item.

1 Press the [New Patient] key to display the ID screen.

2 Enter a search key, if necessary.

Search key (factory default setting)
The Patient ID, Patient Name, Accession Number, and requested Procedure ID can be set on the ID
screen as a search key.

3 Select [Find] on the ID screen.

Load the latest patient data from HIS to display it in the Worklist.
Patient data loaded to the instrument hard disk is retained until it is updated by patient data loaded
from the HIS.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Entering Patient Information | 53
Loading patient data from HIS

2-4-1 Searching the Worklist

Searches for patient data loaded from Hospital Information System (HIS).

1 Press the [New Patient] key to display the ID screen.

2 Select [Worklist] on the ID screen.

 The Worklist is displayed.

3 Search for patient data.

When filtering by examination date
Select a date in the Scheduled on field.

When sorting
When a header is selected, the information is sorted by that header. For example, press ID to sort by ID.

4 Select the patient.

a Use the trackball to move the pointer to the
patient name and press the [Enter] key twice.
 Information from the Worklist is displayed on
the ID screen.

b Select [OK].

 The scanning screen is displayed.

If a message is displayed
There is a mismatch between patient data (patient ID, patient name, sex, birth date) in the Worklist
and on the instrument hard disk.

Select [Worklist] to use information from the Worklist. Select [Local HDD] to use information from
the instrument hard disk.

Some items prioritize values acquired from the Worklist, while others prioritize patient diagnostic
information on the instrument.

Examination description, series description, Uses values acquired from the Worklist.
referring physician's name

Number of pregnancies, number of births, Uses information from the instrument hard disk.
number of abortions/miscarriages,
number of ectopic pregnancies, serum PSA
value

Occupation, height, weight, body surface area Uses the last examination value from the instrument hard disk, if the
Last menstrual date, expected confinement value acquired from the Worklist is NULL. Uses the value acquired from
date, estimated date of ovulation, the Worklist, if it is not NULL.
gestational week at last examination,
expected confinement date at last
examination, gestational week

54 | Entering Patient Information ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Loading Patient Data from the Card (Patient’s Registration Card)

2-5 Loading Patient Data from the Card (Patient’s

Registration Card)

2-5-1 Displaying Patient Data Read from the Card

Preliminary check The following settings must be made in advance.

 Select [Setup > Worklist > Search patient data from Worklist after swipe ID card.] to remove the
checkmark.

1 Press the [New Patient] key to open the ID screen

2 Swipe the card through the reader.

 The patient information appears in the ID screen.

If a message appears, patient data (patient ID, patient name, sex and birth date) on the card is not
identical to data on the instrument hard disk.

Select [OK] to use the data on the card. Select [Cancel] to use the data on the instrument hard disk.

3 Select [OK] or press the [New Patient] key or the [B] key.
 The scanning screen is displayed.

2-5-2 Searching the Worklist Using Patient Data Read from a Card
Preliminary check The following settings must be made in advance.

 Select [Setup > Worklist > Search patient data from Worklist after swipe ID card.] to enter a
checkmark.

 Set the search key in the Worklist tab in the ID screen.

 Set up the HIS server and the network.

1 Press the [New Patient] key to open the ID screen.

2 Swipe the card through the reader.

 Use patient data read from the card to search the Worklist. The search results will be displayed in a
list.

3 Move the cursor to the name of the patient and press the [Enter] key twice.
 The patient data in the Worklist is displayed in the ID screen.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Entering Patient Information | 55
Loading Patient Data from the Card (Patient’s Registration Card)

4 Select [OK].
 The scanning screen is displayed.

56 | Entering Patient Information ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Importing CSV Files

2-6 Importing CSV Files

This function allows you to import CSV files recording patient information created on external devices
and add them to the instrument work list.

Preliminary check Put CSV files directly onto the top level of your USB flash drive.

1 Insert the USB flash drive with the CSV file.

2 Press the [New Patient] key.

3 Select [CSV Import].

 The message “Are you sure you want to import CSV files?” is displayed.

4 Select [OK].
 Copy the patient data to the worklist.

NOTE: Cannot be used in conjunction with a Worklist.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Entering Patient Information | 57
Importing CSV Files

2-6-1 Settings
Make the following settings to read a CSV file.

1 Press the [New Patient] key.

2 Select [SetUp].

3 Select the CSV Import tab.

Settings for reading files

Parameter Option Description

Import Folder Setting Specify the type of media that will store the CSV [Link] USB media is
displayed.
Retrieval Name Enter the file name of the imported file.
Retrieval file name “On”, “Off” A setting that searches CSV files whose file name includes the search
(included today’s date) date.
Import all consistent CSV “On” A setting that searches and imports all matching CSV files.
File
“Off” A setting that imports only the most recently updated CSV files.
Delete CSV File after “On”, “Off” This setting deletes the CSV files after importing them.
importing

58 | Entering Patient Information ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Importing CSV Files

Column Position

Parameter Option Description

Patient ID Sets the position of the Patient ID column in the CSV file.
Name Sets the position of the Name column in the CSV file.
Date of Birth Sets the position of the column for the Date of Birth field in the CSV file.
Gender Sets the position of the Gender field in the CSV file.
Accession # Sets the position of the Accession # field in the CSV file.
Scheduled Date Sets the position of the Scheduled Date column in the CSV file.

Detail Setting

Parameter Option Description

Number of header lines Sets the number of lines that do not contain records (headers, for
example) in the CSV file and that will be skipped.
Attached data and suffix “On”, “Off” Adds a suffix to the Patient ID.
character to Patient ID
Suffix character Determines what suffix to add to a Patient ID.
Separate First and Last “On” Uses the specified delimiter to separate the first and last names.
name
“Off” Lists all last names without separating between first and last names.
Character Determines the delimiters that are used to separate Patient Name.
Format (Date of Birth) “YYYYMMDD” Sets the birth dates in CSV files.
“[Link]”“Y
YYY/MM/DD”
“MMDDYYYY”
“[Link]”“M
M/DD/YYYY”
“GYYMMDD”
“[Link]”
Format (Gender) “1:M 2:F” Sets the format used for sex in the CSV file.
“0:M 1:F”
“M:M F:F”
Format (Scheduled Date) “YYYYMMDD” Sets the scheduled examination date in the CSV file.
“[Link]”
“YYYY/MM/DD”
“MMDDYYYY”
“[Link]”
“MM/DD/YYYY”
“GYYMMDD”
“[Link]”

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Entering Patient Information | 59
ID screen settings

2-7 ID screen settings

Sets display items and items related to Worklist transmission.

1 Select [SetUp] on the ID screen.

2 Edit settings.

3 Select [OK].
When returning to factory default settings
Select [Initialize].

2-7-1 Setting item

Worklist tab

Query keys
Enter a checkmark in the search key you send to the worklist server.

Schedule Procedure Step Start Data

Set a search interval if you select Schedule Procedure Step Start Data using the Query keys.

Search patient data from Worklist after swipe ID card.

Do not search the Worklist after reading the card.
Search the Worklist after reading the card.

Other tab

Insert a check mark for the items to set. If these are set, the settings are applied immediately.

Use separate boxes for "Patient name" and "Referring Physician name"
Sets the patient name field to one column.
Sets the patient name field to three split boxes, for Family/Given/Middle.

Use Requested Procedure/Scheduled Procedure Step Description for Study/Series Description

Do not obtain the Study Description and Series Description from the Worklist.
Obtain the Study Description and Series Description from the Worklist.

Comply to VistA
Displays results filtered with a search key to the Worklist.

60 | Entering Patient Information ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 ID screen settings

Comply to VistA
Displays all examination orders in the Worklist.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Entering Patient Information | 61
ID screen settings

ID Card tab

Sets the data to get from the card reader.

(1) Received Data Data read from the card reader.

(2) Colum Start position (1 to 72) of the text string for the setting item.
(3) Length Length (0 to 72) of the text string for the setting item.
(4) Type Setting item data type (table below).
(5) Communication Communication control settings (device block setting values)

(4) Type settings

[Patient] items Options Content
Ident “ASCII” Patient ID
Name “HEPBURN” Hepburn Romanization
“JAPANESE” Japanese-style Romanization
“ASCII” No Romanization
Family “1”, “2”, “3” Family name position
Given “1”, “2”, “3” Given name position
Middle “1”, “2”, “3” Name position
Sex “MF” M: Male, F: Female
“ZeroOne” 0: Male, 1: Female
“OneTwo” 1: Male, 2: Female
“TwoOne” 2: Male, 1: Female
“OneZero” 1: Male, 0: Female
BirthYear “MTSH” Japanese calendar
“GREGORIAN” Western calendar (4 digits)
BirthMonth “NUMERIC”
BirthDate “NUMERIC”

[Study] items Options Content

Accession “ASCII” Examination ID
ReferPhys “ASCII” Referring physician
Descript “NUMERIC” Examination description (numeric)

[Series] item Options Content

Descript “ASCII” Series description (numeric)

62 | Entering Patient Information ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 ID screen settings

Option settings

Conversion method of half-width

convert into romaji Convert half-width kana into romaji and get the patient name.

Character to remove from Patient ID

hyphen Remove all hyphens from the patient ID.
space Remove all spaces from the patient ID.

Convention method of Patient ID

standards setting Do not add a 0 before the Patient ID.
replace top space with 0 If the first character of the patient ID is a space, replace it with "0".
add 0 to the top Add "0" to the start of the patient ID. Select the number of zeroes from the list on
the right.
digit number Add a 0 before the ID when it and the number of digits have not been set.

Auto reflection To display card reader data on the ID screen, read and display patient data for the
patient ID from the hard disk.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Entering Patient Information | 63
ID screen settings

64 | Entering Patient Information ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 3 Image display

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Image display | 65
B mode

3-1 B mode

B mode will display vital desired section.

3-1-1 Display B mode image

Preliminary check When in quad-screen display, assign the [Quad] to a direct switch or custom switch.

 Display B mode image (single screen).

 Press the [B] key.

Display a real-time B mode image (single

screen).
Then, press the [B] key while frozen to
display the real-time B mode image (single [B] key
screen).

 Display B mode image (dual screen).

Displaying on the horizontal dual screen

a Press the [Dual] key.

b Change [Dual Display Format] to “L/R” on the

touch panel.

Displaying on the vertical dual screen

a Press the [Dual] key.

b Change [Dual Display Format] to “U/D” on

the touch panel.

[Dual] key

 This displays the non-active screen in real time and the others as frozen images.

 Display B mode image (quad).

a Select [Quad] using a direct switch or a
custom switch.

 This displays the active screen in real time and the others as frozen images.

 Switch the active screen.

 To display on dual screen, press the [Dual]  To display on quad screen select [Quad] from
key. direct switch.

66 | Image display ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 B mode

 Change to single-screen display after freezing.

 Press the [Single] key.

 When the display is switched from dual screen or Quad to single screen, the displayed Cine Memory
switches.

Displaying on the horizontal dual screen

1 2 1 2
Active

Displaying on the vertical dual screen

Active
1

2 1 2

 Activate the frozen image.

In dual-screen display

 Press the [Dual] key.

Displaying on the horizontal dual screen

1 2 1 2
Active Active

Displaying on the vertical dual screen

Active

1 1

2 Active 2

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

Information

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Image display | 67
M mode

3-2 M mode

The M mode is a mode which fixes an ultrasound beam on one straight line on a B mode image, to
display and observe the movement over time of an ultrasound wave reflector that is on the straight line.
In the M mode, a scale is displayed in a depth direction by 1 cm (when a depth display is 6 cm or less,
equals to 0.5 cm) and in a time course 0.5 sec. During the real time display, scale lines are displayed only
on the top and bottom edge on the image.

3-2-1 Displaying M Mode Images

1 Press the [M] key.

 The B/M mode image will be displayed. The M cursor is displayed on the B mode.

2 Move the M cursor.

a Use the trackball to move the position of the
cursor.

 The M mode image at the M cursor position is displayed.

Switching the Active Screen

 Press the [Update] key.

 The active screens are switched.

When B Active by Cursor Movement is “On” and the M mode is active, the B mode can be switched
to active with the trackball. Use the Operation tab under Presets ([Preset Setup > Region]) to make
settings of B Active by Cursor Movement.

Active Active

68 | Image display ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 M mode

Switching the Screen

 To change B/M mode to single screen after freezing, press the [Single] key or the [Dual] key.

Active Active

 To switch between B/M mode and the M waveform (single screen) in real time, select [Full M/D].

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Image display | 69
M mode

3-2-2 FAM (Free Angular M) mode

Displays an M mode image on any line of the B mode image.
The M cursor in FAM mode is called the FAM cursor. FAM cursor settings include a method that sets up
to three cursors in free positions (PSAX OFF), and another that batch sets two or three cursors with fixed
center positions (PSAX ON).

Displays FAM Mode

In either real-time or freeze, the display can be switched from the B mode image to FAM mode.

Preliminary check Assign [FAM] to direct switch.

 Switch to FAM mode in a real-time image.

a Display either B or M mode.

b Select [FAM] from direct switch.

 Once frozen, switch to FAM mode.

a Display B mode (single screen).

b Press the [Freeze/B Gain] key to freeze.

c Select [FAM] from direct switch.

d Press the [M] key.

 The FAM image will be displayed.

 Switching to FAM mode to save the moving image

NOTE: The only videos that can be displayed in FAM mode are tomographic images saved as RGB+Raw.

a Playback video images in full screen on the

review screen.

b Switch to B mode (single screen).

c Select [FAM] from direct switch.

d Press the [M] key.

 The display switches to B/FAM mode. The
FAM cursor is displayed on the B mode
image.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

Information

70 | Image display ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 M mode

Setting the FAM cursor in any desired position (PSAX OFF)

Preliminary check [PSAX] has to be turned Off in advance. Configure the settings to one of the following.

 Uncheck On under PSAX, which is located within the Common tab under Presets ([Preset Setup >
Application > Edit Data > M]).

 Turn [PSAX] assignment to Off using direct switch, custom switch or the function menu.

1 Push [FAM] from direct switch.

 The FAM cursor is displayed on the B mode image.

2 Set the positions and orientations of FAM cursors.

 Use the trackball to move the cursor.

 Turn the [Pointer] key to rotate the cursor.

3 Increasing the FAM cursors.

a Press the [Enter] key. Presets ([Preset Setup > Application > Edit Data >
M]).
b Set the position and orientation of the FAM
cursors in the same way as in step 2. c Repeat steps a to b to set additional FAM

Setting the number of FAM cursors cursors.

Configure the number of FAM cursors under FAM

Cursor Number within the Common tab under

Clearing excess FAM cursors

Assign [Active FAM disp. off] to direct switch, custom switch, or the function menu.

a Press the [Enter] key to activate the target

FAM cursor.

b Select [Active FAM disp. off].

 The selected cursor will be deleted. The
remaining cursors are displayed as A and B,
with A being the newer one.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

Information

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Image display | 71
M mode

Setting the FAM Cursor (PSAX ON)

Preliminary check [PSAX] has to be turned On in advance. Configure the settings to one of the following.

 Check On under [PSAX], which is located within the Common tab under Presets ([Preset Setup >
Application > Edit Data > M]).

 Configure the [PSAX] assignment to On under direct switch, custom switch, or the function menu.

1 Switch to B/FAM mode.

 The FAM cursor is displayed on the B mode image.

2 Set the positions and orientations of FAM cursors.

 Use the trackball to move the cursor.

 Turn the [Pointer] key to rotate the cursor.

Shifting just one cursor to another position and orientation

Assign [Center Independence] to direct switch, custom switch, or the function menu.

a Turn [Center Independence] On.

 FAM cursor A will become the active cursor.

b Move FAM cursor A using the trackball and

set its position.
Activating other cursors

Press the [Enter] key.

3 If FAM mode is not displayed, press the [M] key.

 The M mode image on the FAM cursor is displayed as a FAM mode image. The FAM mode screen is
divided vertically according to the number of cursors.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

Information

72 | Image display ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 M mode

Changing the display magnification of the FAM mode image

Preliminary check The following must be assigned using the presets.

 Assign [Trace Fit] and [MAG FAM] to direct switch, custom switch, or the function menu.

 Assign [Sweep Speed (M)] to the function menu.

 Changing the display magnification in diagnostic distance.

a Turn touch panel and/or custom switch
[Trace Fit] to Off.

b Change the display magnification under

[MAG (FAM)] in the function menu.
 The display magnification of the FAM image
will be changed based on the diagnostic
distance (depth) of the B mode image.

Match the FAM cursor length with the diagnostic distance of the B mode image
Turn touch panel and/or custom switch [Trace Fit] to On.

 Change sweep speed.

a Adjust using [Sweep Speed (M)] under the
function menu.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

information

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Image display | 73
Color Flow Mode

3-3 Color Flow Mode

The following modes are available in color flow mode.

 Color Flow Mode

Like other Doppler modes, Doppler information is obtained from the change in the approaching
and receding blood flow.

 Power Doppler Mode

Colors the image according to the intensity (area) of the color Doppler signals. It is sensitive to slow
blood flows.

 eFlow mode
Displays in high-resolution Power Doppler mode. This mode is suitable for detailed observation of
blood flow.

74 | Image display ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Color Flow Mode

3-3-1 Displaying Color Flow Mode Images

Preliminary check Assign [PD] to direct switch, custom switch, or the function menu.
If required, assign [Directional] to a direct switch, custom switch or the function menu.

1 Display the B mode image.

2 Switch to color flow mode.

 Press the [CF] key.

CF mode will be engaged.

 Select [PD].

PD mode will be engaged.

 Press [eFlow] key.

eFlow mode will be engaged.

When PD mode and eFlow mode display the blood flow direction
Turn the touch panel or custom switch [Directional] to On.

3 Set the flow area.

a Use the trackball to move the flow area.

b Press the [Enter] key.

c Adjust the size of the flow area using the

trackball.

d Press the [Enter] key.

e Repeat steps a to d to set the flow area.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

Information

Go back to displaying only the tomographic image

 Press the [B] key.

 The B mode image is displayed.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Image display | 75
Color Flow Mode

Displaying on dual screen

Preliminary check Assign [Dual CF] to direct switch, custom switch, or the function menu.

Displays the B mode image on the left or on the top screen, and the Color Flow mode image on the right
or bottom screen in dual screen mode.

 Select [Dual CF] on Color Flow mode (single screen).

Displaying on the horizontal dual screen

a Change [Dual Display Format] to “L/R” on the Select [Dual CF] again to go back to the Color

touch panel. Flow mode single screen.

 Displays the B mode image on the left and

the Color Flow image on the right in dual
screen mode.

Displaying on the vertical dual screen

a Change [Dual Display Format] to “U/D” on Select [Dual CF] again to go back to the Color

the touch panel. Flow mode single screen.

 Displays the B mode image on the top and

the Color Flow mode image on the bottom in
dual screen mode.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

Information

Displays the accumulation of color pixels

Preliminary check The following settings must be made in advance.

 Assign [Accumu. Imaging] to direct switch, custom switch, or the function menu.

 Assign [Accumulation Time] to function menu.

Integrate designated time and color information to Accumulation Time and superimpose the
accumulation.

1 Press the [CF] key and display Color Flow mode image.

2 Turn [Accumu. Imaging] On.

3 Set the accumulation time under [Accumulation Time].

4 Once finished, set [Accumu. Imaging] to Off.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

Information

76 | Image display ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 D Mode

3-4 D Mode

The D mode displays the data on the blood flow in the heart and blood vessels using Doppler effect.
Instead, it displays blood flow information in waveforms.
The B/D mode simultaneously displays a B mode image and a D mode image. It observes blood flow
information on a D mode image while checking the B mode image to see what part of the body the
detected blood flow information belongs to.
The following two kinds of ultrasound beams are used to display a D mode image.

 PW Doppler
Emits the ultrasound beam as discrete pulses to display a D mode image. You can obtain blood flow
information concerning any point on a B mode image.

 CW Doppler
Emits the ultrasound beam continuously to display a D mode image. You can change the ultrasonic
wave transmission direction by connecting a steerable CW compatible probe. CW Doppler can
detect the peak flow velocity as it receives signals at all depths.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Image display | 77
D Mode

3-4-1 Displaying the PW waveform

Use the steps below to display Pulse Doppler waveforms.

Preliminary check If required, assign the following.

 Assign [Sample Volume] to the function menu.

 Assign [Simultaneous (PW)] to a direct switch or custom switch.

1 Press the [PW] key.

 B/PW will be engaged, and the D cursor will be displayed on top of the B mode image.

2 Configuring the sample volume setting.

a Roll the trackball to adjust the sample a
volume to the detection position.

b Adjust the size of the sample volume using

the [Sample Volume] multi rotary encoder.

3 Press the [Update] key.

 The B mode image will be frozen, and a PW waveform will appear.

To switch to active, press the [Update] key again.

When B Active by Cursor Movement is “On” and the PW mode is active, the B mode can be switched
to active with the trackball. Use the Operation tab under Presets ([Preset Setup > Region]) to make
settings of B Active by Cursor Movement.

Active Active

78 | Image display ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 D Mode

To make both the B mode image or PW waveform active, select [Simultaneous (PW)] from either a
direct switch or a custom switch.

Active Active
Reference Assigning functions → p.333
Information

Using angle correction

If required, assign the following.

 Assign [Angle Correction] to the function menu.

 Assign [Auto Angle Correction] to a direct switch, custom switch, or the function menu.
For more information on assigning tasks to the menu, angle-correction menus, and presets, refer to the
separate Basic Operation Section.

Angle Correction can be implemented in real-time or after freezing.

 Use the [Angle Correction] multi rotary encoder to correct the angle.

 The angle is automatically adjusted using [Auto Angle Correction] on the touch panel or
custom switch.
NOTE: This adjustment can only be performed in color flow mode.

Reference Initialize the diagnostic field settings → p.316

Information For Other menu and presets with regard to angle corrections, see the following:

Function menu: D → p.217

Application Parameters: M → p.282
Diagnostic Field Settings Parameters: B → p.321

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Image display | 79
D Mode

Switching the Screen

 To change B/PW mode to single screen after freezing, press the [Single] key or the [Dual] key.

Active Active

 To switch between B/PW mode and the PW waveform (single screen) in real time, select [Full
M/D].

80 | Image display ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 D Mode

3-4-2 Displaying the CW Waveform

Use the steps below to display continuous Doppler waveforms.

Preliminary check Please refer to separate "Instruction for use Section" for the appropriate probe.
Linear and convex probes for acquiring CW waveforms make it possible to change the starting point of
the cursor.
Assign [Cursor Posi. (LN/CV CW)] to the function menu.

1 Press the [CW] key.

 B/CW will be engaged, and the D cursor will be displayed on top of the B mode image.

2 Use [Cursor Posi. (LN/CV CW)] on the touch panel to change cursor starting point for a linear
and convex probe.

3 Configure the reference mark .

a Roll the trackball to match the reference
mark to the detection position.

4 Press the [Update] key.

 The B mode image will be frozen, and a CW waveform will appear.

To switch to active, press the [Update] key again.

When B Active by Cursor Movement is “On” and the CW mode is active, the B mode can be switched
to active with the trackball. Use the Operation tab under Presets ([Preset Setup > Region]) to make
settings of B Active by Cursor Movement.

Active Active

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

Information

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Image display | 81
D Mode

Using angle correction

If required, assign the following.

 Assign [Angle Correction] to the function menu.

 Assign [Auto Angle Correction] to a direct switch, custom switch, or the function menu.

Angle Correction can be implemented in real-time or after freezing.

 Use the [Angle Correction] multi rotary encoder to correct the angle.

 The angle is automatically adjusted using [Auto Angle Correction] on the touch panel or
custom switch.
NOTE: This adjustment can only be performed in color flow mode.

Reference Initialize the diagnostic field settings → p.316

Information For Other menu and presets with regard to angle corrections, see the following:

Function menu: D → p.217

Application Parameters: M → p.282
Diagnostic Field Settings Parameters: B → p.321

Switching the Screen

 To change B/CW mode to single screen after freezing, press the [Single] key or the [Dual] key.

Active Active

 To switch between B/CW mode and the CW waveform (single screen) in real time, select [Full
M/D].

82 | Image display ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 D Mode

3-4-3 Displaying with Dual Gate Doppler.

Sets two D cursors on the tomographic image and displays two Doppler waveforms on the Doppler
mode screen.

Preliminary check Please refer to separate "Instruction for use Section" for the appropriate probe.
Assign [Dual Gate Doppler] to direct switch or custom switch.
Assign [Dual Dop. Combination], [Dual Dop. Select], [Angle Correction], [Sample Volume] to the function
menu.

Dual Gate Doppler simultaneously displays Doppler waveforms for two different Doppler sampling
points. The following combinations of waveforms are displayed.

 PW/PW

 PW/TD-PW

 TD-PW/TD-PW

NOTE: Real-time Doppler Auto Trace cannot be used with Dual Gate Doppler.

1 Display a tomographic image.

2 Select [Dual Gate Doppler].

 Two D cursors are displayed on the tomographic image.

Dual Gate
Doppler
1 2

The cursor labeled “1” is the D1 cursor, and the one labeled “2” is the D2 cursor.

3 Select a Doppler combination with [Dual Gate Doppler Combination].

Display of the D1 cursor and D2 cursor, according to the Doppler combination

[Dual Gate Doppler Combination] “PW/PW” “PW/TDI” “TDI/TDI”

D1 cursor and D2 cursor display

1 2 1 2 1 2

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Image display | 83
D Mode

4 Set the D1 cursor.

a Roll the trackball to adjust the sample
a b D1
volume to the detection position.

b Adjust the size of the sample volume using D2

the [Sample Volume] multi rotary encoder.

1.0mm
c Correct the angle using the [Angle
Sample Volume
Correction] multi rotary encoder.

5 Set the D2 cursor.

a Press the [Enter] key. Or select [Dual Dop. a
Select].
 The D2 cursor will become active.
1 2 1 2
b Set the D2 cursor as in step 4.
TIP: Use the [Enter] key or [Dual Dop. Select] to
switch the active cursor between D1 cursor and
D2 cursor.

6 Display the Doppler waveform.

a Press the [Update] key. D1
 Two Doppler waveforms are displayed at the
same time.
D2

NOTE: When B Active by Cursor Movement is “On” and the Doppler mode is active, the B mode can be switched to
active with the trackball. Use the Operation tab under Presets ([Preset Setup > Region]) to make settings of B Active
by Cursor Movement.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

Information

84 | Image display ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 TDI Mode

3-5 TDI Mode

The TDI Mode represents the movement speeds of tissues (mainly cardiac muscle) in color on the
tomographic image.
Similarly, the TD-PW Mode represents the movement speeds of tissues (mainly cardiac muscle) as a
Doppler waveform.

Compatible Probes Refer to the separate "Instruction for use Section".

The following settings must be made in advance.

 Assign [TDI] to direct switch or custom switch.

 Assign [TD-PW] to direct switch or custom switch.

 Assign [Sample Volume] to the function menu.

1 Displaying a B mode image in real time.

2 Select [TDI].
 Displays TDI mode images.

3 Set the flow area.

a Use the trackball to move the flow area and
press the [Enter] key.

b Use the trackball to change the size of the

flow area and press the [Enter] key.

4 Displaying Doppler waveforms.

a Press the [PW] key. a d
b Conform sample volume to detection
position in trackball.

c Adjust the size of the sample volume using

the [Sample Volume] multi rotary encoder.

d Press the [Update] key.

 TDI/TD-PW mode will be displayed.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Image display | 85
TDI Mode

To switch from B mode to TD-PW mode image display

a Display a B mode image.

b Select [TD-PW].

c Press the [Update] key.

 The TD-PW mode will be displayed.

NOTE: When B Active by Cursor Movement is “On” and the TD-PW mode is active, the B mode can be switched to
active with the trackball. Use the Operation tab under Presets ([Preset Setup > Region]) to make settings of B Active
by Cursor Movement.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

Information

86 | Image display ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Adjust the image

3-6 Adjust the image

Preliminary check Assign [QSS Registration] to the function menu.

Parameters related to the image quality of the displayed image can be changed individually, or as a
batch. The individual parameters are explained below, starting on the next page. Refer to the “Menus
chapter” in this guide for parameters which are not covered in this chapter.
Batch-changed parameters can be set as QSS presets corresponding to body shapes and organs.

 Select the QSS presets to apply.

 The selected QSS preset is applied.

The default QSS presets are [Preset A], [Preset B], [Preset C], and [Preset D].

 Reflect the current status of the analysis screen in QSS presets.

a Select [QSS Registration] from the function c Select [Copy Execute].
menu.  The current status of the analysis screen is

b Select where to copy the presets from, and copied to the selected QSS preset.

then where you'd like to copy them to. If [Exit] is selected instead of [Copy Execute],
the expanded menu is closed without
copying.

Reference Editing QSS presets → p.292

Information Assigning functions → p.333

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Image display | 87
Adjust the image

3-6-1 Adjusting the gain

Adjusting B mode image gain

Preliminary check Assign [TGC Memory] to the function menu.

 Use the [Freeze/B Gain] key to adjust the gain for the B mode image.

 Turn the [Freeze/B Gain] key to the right.

This increases the image sensitivity.

 Turn the [Freeze/B Gain] key to the left.

This decreases the image sensitivity.

 Adjusting the gain for each depth.

Adjust with the [TGC] knob for the depth to adjust.

 Slide the [TGC] knob right.

This increases the image sensitivity.

 Slide the [TGC] knob left.

This decreases the image sensitivity.

Using the changed key positions as user settings

The position of each key can be stored for each application.

a Use the [TGC] knob to adjust.

b Select [TGC Memory] from the function

menu.

c Select [Registration] on the touch panel.

d Change the [TGC Curve] to “Custom” on the

touch panel.

e Move the [TGC] knob to the center position.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

Information

Adjusting M mode image gain

Adjust the M mode image gain as a correction value for B gain.

 Turn the [M] key to adjust.

Change the offset value for B gain
Use M Offset Gain, which is a QSS M item, to change the offset value.

88 | Image display ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Adjust the image

Adjusting D Mode Image Gain

Adjust the gain levels for the PW, CW, and TDI[PW] modes.

 Turn the [PW] key to adjust D gain.

As with CW mode, use the [PW] key to adjust gain.

Adjusting Color Flow mode image gain

 Turn the [CF] key to adjust flow gain.

Adjusting gain automatically

Use Auto Optimizer to combine image and display settings (Gain, TGC, LGC, base line shift, PRF, etc.) and
automatically adjust according to the depicted images and display the optimum image or waveform.

Reference For details, refer to the following.

Information Auto Optimizer → p.90

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Image display | 89
Adjust the image

3-6-2 Auto Optimizer

This function automatically adjusts submitted images to enable display of optimized images and
waveforms.
Set Target under the Common tab in the presets ([Preset Setup > Application > Edit Data > General]) for
items that should be automatically adjusted.

Preliminary check To enable automatic adjustment of B or M mode images, assign the following items to the function
menu.

 [Brightness Level]

 [Brightness Level (Manual)]

 [Auto-optimizer Reset]

 Press the [Auto-optimizer] key for the B or M mode image.

 Gain will be automatically adjusted and the B or M mode gain display will be highlighted.

The B or M mode target brightness value can be switched to “Auto” or “Manual” using [Brightness
Level]. For “Manual”, configure the target value using [Brightness Level (Manual)]. Or, select
[Auto-optimizer Reset] in B mode to reset TGC and LGC to default (before Auto Optimization).

 Press the [Auto-optimizer] key for the D mode image.

 The gain, Doppler speed range (PRF), and Doppler base line are automatically adjusted.

Use Base Line Position under the Common tab in the presets ([Preset Setup > Application > Edit
Data > General]) to shift the Doppler base line.

 Press the [Auto-optimizer] key for the Color Flow mode image.
 Flow Gain is adjusted automatically.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

Information Application parameter: General → p.278

90 | Image display ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Adjust the image

3-6-3 Switching frequencies

NOTE: Transmission frequency is fixed in CW and TDI modes.

Switching Transmission Frequencies

Switch the transmission frequency in real time B mode or M mode.

Preliminary check Assign [Frequency (B)] to the function menu.

 Use [Frequency (B)] in the function menu to switch frequency.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

Information

Switching R-Filter

Switch the R-Filter in real time B mode or M mode.

Preliminary check Assign [R-Filter (B)] to the function menu.

 Use [R-Filter (B)] in the function menu to switch the R-Filter.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

information

Switching tissue harmonics method

Use real time B mode or M mode to switch the method to use in tissue harmonics.

Preliminary check Assign [THI Mode] to the function menu.

 Use [THI Mode] in the function menu to switch the method to use in tissue harmonics.
 The method to use in tissue harmonics (FmT, WbT, HdT) is switched.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

information

Switching reference frequencies

Switching the standard frequency when analyzing frequencies.

Preliminary check Assign [Ref. Frequency (D)] or [Ref. Frequency (Color)] to the function menu.

 Use [Ref. Frequency (D)] or [Ref. Frequency (Color)] in the function menu to switch reference
frequency.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

Information

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Image display | 91
Adjust the image

3-6-4 Setting the focus position

Set the focal position of the ultrasound beam to improve the spatial resolution or sensitivity of the
image.
Focus setting may be Auto or Manual. Make the following settings, depending on the display mode.
Make the focus setting using Focus Control (Color) on the Common tab of the presets ([Preset Setup >
Application > Edit Data > Color]).

Display Mode Auto Focus Manual Focus

B Mode The focus point ( ) is set automatically Once the focus point ( ) is set, the
in conjunction with the display range. system maintains it, regardless of the
The automatically set focus point can be display range.
moved at will.
Multi-stage focus can be set.*1 Multi-stage focus can be set.*1
M Mode The focus point is set in coordination with the B mode.
Only single focus is available.
Color Doppler mode Set near the center of the flow area. The focus point can be moved at will
(CF, PD, eFlow, TDI) Only single focus is available. within the range of the flow area.
The focus mark is not displayed. Only single focus is available.
The focus mark ( ) is displayed in the
same color as the flow area.
D mode (PW, CW) Follows the display position of the The focus position is set.
sample volume; only single focus is
available.

*1. The number of stages that can be set varies with the mode, such as the observation mode (Fundamental, THI, Coded) or the
simultaneous operation mode (B/M, B/PW, etc.)

Moving the focus position

 Use the [FOCUS/VELOCITY] paddle switch to move the focus position.

When in B mode
Set the Operation tab Velocity/Focus Puddle SW under the presets ([Preset Setup > Region > General])
to “Focus” or “Dependent Mode”.

Color Doppler mode

Set the Velocity/Focus Puddle SW under the Operation tab in the preset ([Preset Setup > Region >
General]) to “Focus”.

a Make the tomographic image active.

b Use the [FOCUS/VELOCITY] paddle switch to

move the focus position.

92 | Image display ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Adjust the image

 Use the trackball to move the focus position.

Set Trackball Priority (Focus) in the presets ([Preset Setup > Region > General]) under the Operations tab
to “On”.

a Make the tomographic image active.

b Use the trackball to move the focus position.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Image display | 93
Adjust the image

Changing the number of steps and their intervals

Preliminary check Assign [Focus Set] to the function menu.

1 Activate B mode image.

2 Select [Focus Set] from the function menu.

3 Change the number of steps or intervals.

 Use the [Focus Step] multi-rotary encoder to

change the number of steps.

 Use the [Focus Width] multi-rotary encoder

to change intervals.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

Information

94 | Image display ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Adjust the image

3-6-5 Switching the display area

Changing display range

The display depth is switched over based on the transmission point of the displayed image.

Preliminary check Turn Hi Zoom or Pan Zoom off.

Cancel freeze and switch to real time.

 Turn the [PAN ZOOM/DEPTH] key to change display range.

Setting the direction of [PAN ZOOM/DEPTH] key rotation and the direction of the displayed image
Turn Clockwise to Zoom In in the preset ([System Preset > General > Common1 > Zoom Setting]).

“On”: Turn the [PAN ZOOM/DEPTH] key clockwise to reduce the displayed image.

“Off”: Turn the [PAN ZOOM/DEPTH] key clockwise to magnify the displayed image.

NOTE: The upper and lower limits of display range vary between probes.

Moving the image in the vertical direction

Move the tomographic image under observation up and down.

Preliminary check Turn Hi Zoom or Pan Zoom off.

Cancel freeze and switch to real time.
Assign [Vertical Shift] to to direct switch, function menu or custom switch.

 Select [Vertical Shift] and move the tomographic image vertically with the trackball.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

Information

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Image display | 95
Adjust the image

Setting the scan area

Set the area of the B mode image scanning range.

Preliminary check Assign [Scan Area] to direct switch or custom switch.

1 Select [Scan Area].

2 Set the scan area.

a Use the trackball to enlarge or reduce the
scan area.
Roll trackball to the right and the scan area will
expand; roll it to the left to shrink it.
b Press the [Enter] key.
 The configured scan area width is fixed which
allows it to be moved.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

Information

Changing layout in dual screen display

Preliminary check Assign [B/D Format] or [B/M Format] to a direct switch, custom switch or the function menu.

 Select [B/D Format] or [B/M Format].

 In “U/D”, display the tomographic image above and the sweep image below.

In “L/R”, display the tomographic image on the left and the sweep image on the right.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

information

Adjusting the baseline position for color display gradation

Preliminary check Assign [Baseline Shift (Color)] to the function menu.

 Adjust the 0 cm/s position using [Baseline Shift (Color)].

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

Information

96 | Image display ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Adjust the image

Changing the display movement speed in Sweep mode

Preliminary check Assign [Sweep Speed (M)] or [Sweep Speed (D)] to the function menu.

 In M mode, use [Sweep Speed (M)] in the function menu to change the sweep speed.

 In PW mode or CW mode, use [Sweep Speed (D)] in the function menu to change the sweep
speed.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

information

Shifting the baseline vertically

Adjust the baseline (0cm/s) position of the waveform.

Preliminary check Assign [Baseline Shift (D)] to the function menu.

 Use [Baseline Shift (D)] in the function menu to adjust 0 cm/s position.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

Information

Changing velocity range

Change the vertical axis display range or the color flow velocity value range in D mode.

Preliminary check Assign [Vel. Range (D)] or [Vel. Range (Color)] to the function menu.

 Adjust [[Link] (D)] in the function menu in PW or CW mode.

 In Color Flow mode (color flow or PD), use [Vel. Range (Color)] to adjust.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

Information

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Image display | 97
Adjust the image

3-6-6 Rotating and inverting images

Rotating tomographic Images

Preliminary check Assign [Image Rotation] to direct switch, custom switch, or the function menu.

 Use [Image Rotation] on the touch panel or in the custom switches to rotate a tomographic
image.
 Images are displayed as shown below, depending on the value.

“0” “90” “180” “270”

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

Information

Inverting tomographic Images

Preliminary check Assign [Invert L/R] or [Invert U/L] to direct switch, custom switch, or the function menu.

 Select [Invert L/R] on the touch panel.

 The tomographic image will be horizontally inverted.

“Off” “On”

 Select [Invert U/L] on the touch panel or in the custom switches.

 The tomographic image will be vertically inverted.

“Off” “On”

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

Information

98 | Image display ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Adjust the image

3-6-7 Inverting Doppler waveform and colors

Inverting waveform display

Preliminary check Assign [Invert Spectrum] to direct switch, custom switch, or the function menu.

 Select [Invert Spectrum] on the touch panel or in the custom switches.

Display Example Invert the vertical display waveform according to the axis configured in Invert Axis (D) within the
Common tab under presets ([Preset Setup > Region > Doppler]).

[Invert Spectrum] “Off” “On” “On”

[Invert Axis (D)] N/A “Center” “Base Line”

Display example.
(1) is the center line. (2)
(2) is the baseline

(1)

If Invert Link within the Common tab under the presets ([Preset Setup > Region > Doppler]) is configured
to On, the color polarity as well as [Invert Spectrum] will invert.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

Information

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Image display | 99
Adjust the image

Reversing color polarity

The color map can be inverted with Color Flow, Directional PD, and Directional eFlow.

Preliminary check Assign [Invert Color Map] to direct switch, custom switch, or the function menu.

 Select [Invert Color Map] on the touch panel or in the custom switches.
 The color polarity will invert.

[Invert Color Map] “Off” “On”

Configuring Invert Link to On within the Common Tab under presets ([Preset Setup > Region >
Doppler]) will link the color polarity to [Invert Spectrum] and invert it.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

Information

100 | Image display ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Adjust the image

3-6-8 Zooming the image

Zoom in on any desired region of the tomographic image.
Pan Zoom and HI Zoom are methods for zooming in on tomographic images.
PAN Zoom can also zoom in on a frozen image.
HI Zoom enlarges an image with a narrower line density than Pan Zoom, and with a higher definition
and frame rate. HI Zoom only works on real time tomographic images.

Pan Zoom

Preliminary check Turn HI Zoom off.

1 Press the [PAN ZOOM/DEPTH] key to turn on Pan Zoom.

2 Turn the [PAN ZOOM/DEPTH] key to zoom.

 The image is zoomed in or out about the center.

3 Roll the trackball to display the target area.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Image display | 101
Adjust the image

HI Zoom

Preliminary check Turn Pan Zoom off.

Cancel freeze and switch to real time.
NOTE: 360° radial probes are not compatible with this function.

NOTE: In zoom mode, turn the [PAN ZOOM/DEPTH] key clockwise to further enlarge an image and PAN Zoom mode
will be engaged. You can use the trackball in this mode to move an image. To return to HI Zoom status, turn the
[PAN ZOOM/DEPTH] key counterclockwise to return the image to its original size.

1 Press [HI Zoom] key.

For Flow, eFlow and Power Flow
Pressing the [HI Zoom] key will enlarge the target area.

2 Use the trackball to move the ROI, or to adjust the ROI size.
Moving the ROI
Roll the trackball to move ROI.

Adjusting ROI size

Adjust the ROI size by pressing the [Enter] key when the trackball function is .

For a convex or a sector probe, turn the trackball clockwise to enlarge an ROI horizontally and turn it
counterclockwise to reduce it horizontally. Turn the trackball upwards to enlarge the ROI vertically and
turn it downward to reduce it vertically. Press the [Enter] key again to finalize ROI size.

Press the [UNDO] to return to step 1.

3 Press the [Update] key.

 The target area will expand.

Press the [UNDO] to return to step 2.

4 Press the [HI Zoom] key again to turn off HI Zoom.

Using HI Zoom to move ROI

Preliminary check Select the [Zoom ROI re-display by Trackball] checkbox under the Preset ([Preset Setup > Region >
General]) Operation tab.

1 Make sure that Trackball Priority is set to Zoom in HI Zoom mode.

2 Move the trackball while zoomed in.

 The zoom mode is canceled allowing you to move ROI.

3 Change the ROI location and again press the [Update] key.
 The Zoom screen reappears.

102 | Image display ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Adjust the image

3-6-9 Switching observation modes (THI, Coded)

Switch the observation mode to enhance spatial resolution and depth sensitivity.
There are three observation modes for tomographic images: B mode, Tissue Harmonic Imaging (THI
mode), and Coded Imaging (Coded mode).

I) THI mode

THI mode is an observation mode that forms images from the harmonic component reflected from
tissue (tissue harmonics). Tissue harmonics enables a clear image that is free from artifacts such as
side lobes. Particularly, this mode offers improved image diagnosis of patients who do not readily
transmit ultrasound wave signals. Since the receiving frequency is high, the sensitivity slightly
decreases. Pay careful attention to the sensitivity when examining a patient.

This observation mode is divided into three classifications by CHI method.

 FmT: Filter-method Tissue Harmonic Imaging

This method displays a THI mode image without reducing frame rate.

 WbT: Wide-band Tissue Harmonic Imaging

This method displays a THI mode image with higher resolution than FmT.

 HdT: High Definition Tissue Harmonic Imaging

This method displays a THI mode image with higher resolution than Wbt.

II) Coded Mode

Coded Imaging, or CHI Method, is a method that codes the sent waveform. In B mode, it improves
sensitivity in deep regions. In eFlow mode, it enhances spatial resolution more than PD mode does.

NOTE: THI mode and Coded mode are not available with some probes. Refer to the separate "Instruction for use
Section".

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Image display | 103
Adjust the image

Switching observation modes

Reference Assign [THI] or [Coded] to a direct switch, custom switch or the function menu.
Information

1 Activate B mode or Color Flow mode.

2 Set [THI] or [Coded] on the touch panel or in the custom to On.

Observation Mode Tx mode display of frequency

B mode “FND” Displays in normal B mode.
Turn [THI ] and [Coded] Off.
THI mode “FmT” , “WbT”, or “HdT” Displays with Tissue Harmonic
[THI] is On. Imaging.
Coded Mode “CdI” Displays with CHI Method.
[Coded] is On.

Reference Switching frequencies → p.91

Information Assigning functions → p.333

104 | Image display ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Adjust the image

3-6-10 Setting image quality filters

Filter processes are used to reduce speckle noise and emphasize structures.

Reference If required, assign the following.

Information Assign [HI REZ], [Enh. Level (B)] and [Enh. Level (M)] to the function menu.

Assign [Echo Enh. (B]), [Echo Enh. (M)], [Texture] to direct switch, custom switch, or the function menu.

Apply image quality filters to B mode or M mode images to improve image quality. There are four types
of filters.

 HI REZ: Maintains the edges of structures while reducing speckle noise.

 [Enh. Level (B)]: When [HI REZ] is OFF, the edge enhancement level changes.

 [Enh. Level (M)]: Changes edge enhancement level on the M mode image.

 [Echo Enh. (B)], [Echo Enh. (M)]: Creates an image from a weak signal by lowering brightness in
low-bright areas and increasing it in high-bright areas.

 Texture: This changes the texture of the image quality.

 Maintain the edges of structures while reducing speckle noise.

a Turn [HI REZ] On.
 [Enh. Level (B)] will turn Off.

b Change the level with [HI REZ Level].

 Change the level of edge enhancement.

NOTE: Turn [HI REZ] Off.

 Adjust using [Enh. Level (B)] to change in B

mode.

 Adjust using [Enh. Level (M)] to change in M

mode.

 Adjust [Echo Enh. (B)] or [Echo Enh. (M)].

 Creates an image from a weak signal by lowering brightness in low-bright areas and increasing it in
high-bright areas.

 Change [Texture] to “Smooth” or “Sharp”.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

Information

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Image display | 105
Adjust the image

3-6-11 Compound mode

Ultrasound beams from multiple different angles are synthesized to reduce artifacts.

Preliminary check This function is compatible with convex and linear-type probes. Refer to the separate "Instruction for use
Section".
Assign [Compound] to direct switch, custom switch, or the function menu.
Assign [Angle (Compound)], [Compound: #], and [Steer (Compound)] to the function menu if necessary.

What is It is a function that synthesizes ultrasound beams from different angles. This process reduces artifacts in
"Compound"? the ultrasound emission direction, such as side lobes, multiple echoes and speckle noise.

1 Activate B mode image.

2 Select [Compound].
Changing compound mode settings

 Change the angle using [Angle

(Compound)].
Direction mark when [Compound] is On.
 [Compound: #] to change the transmit and
echo angles.

 Configure the CHI Method using [Steer

(Compound)].

Display Example On the left is [Compound] set to Off. On the right is [Compound] set to On.

NOTE: The shape of the zoom ROI may differ.

NOTE: The frame rate may decrease if [Compound] is set to Off.

Select [Compound] again from the function menu once completed and set it to Off.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

Information

106 | Image display ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Adjust the image

3-6-12 Trapezoidal scan

Displays an image with a trapezoidal field of view using a linear-type probe and enlarges the orientation
direction of the field of view.

Reference Please refer to separate "Instruction for use Section" for the appropriate probe.
Information Assign [Trapezoidal Scanning] to a direct switch, custom switch or the function menu.

1 Activate B mode image.

2 Select [Trapezoidal Scanning].

Display Example To the left is an example of [Trapezoidal Scanning]Off. To the right is an example of [Trapezoidal
Scanning]On.

To turn off, select [Trapezoidal Scanning] again and turn it off.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

Information

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Image display | 107
Adjust the image

3-6-13 Adjusting the direction of the ultrasound beam

Changes the steering angle of the ultrasound beam (beam steering) in an electronic linear probe.

Reference Only the linear probe is [Link] to the separate "Instruction for use Section".
Information Assign the following required menus to the function menu.

 [Beam Steer (B)]

 [Beam Steer (D)]

 [Beam Steer (Color)]

If required, assign [Invert Link] to a direct switch, custom switch or the function menu.

1 Switch to real time.

2 Set the steering angle.

 Use [Beam Steer (B)] to adjust B mode

images.

 Use [Beam Steer (D)] to adjust a D mode

images.

 Use [Beam Steer (Color)] to adjust a color

mode images.

Taking perpendicular incidence from the probe as 0deg, the range of adjustment is -30deg to +30deg.

If [Invert Link] is On, the spectrum inverts when the polarity changes.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

Information

108 | Image display ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Dynamic Slow-motion Display (D.S.D)

3-7 Dynamic Slow-motion Display (D.S.D)

DSD displays real-time images and slow-motion images side by side.

The real-time image remains displayed on the left side, and the slow-motion image is displayed on the
right side. It is a mode in which you can observe the quick movements of the embryonic heart and valve
cusp in detail.
There are 2 types of D.S.D.: DSD (ECG) mode, DSD (Time) mode.

 DSD (ECG) mode

This mode provides slow-motion display, synchronized to the ECG R wave. The slow-motion display
is refreshed at a fixed R wave interval.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Real-time
ECG wave

Slow motion 1 3 5
ECG wave

The above image is when the slow motion display is being refreshed every two heartbeats. The arrow indicates the
timing of the switch to DSD (ECG) mode.

 DSD (Time) mode

Slow-motion display starts from the time it is selected in the menu. The slow-motion display is
refreshed at the set time interval.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Real-time
(sec)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Real-time
(Frames)

Frame 3 Frame 5 Frame 7

Slow motion

The above image is when the slow motion display is being refreshed every two seconds. The arrow indicates the
timing of the switch to DSD (Time) mode.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Image display | 109
Dynamic Slow-motion Display (D.S.D)

3-7-1 Displaying in D.S.D (ECG) mode

This mode provides slow-motion display, synchronized to the ECG R-wave.

Preliminary check The optional SOP-ARIETTA70-57 is required.

Select [ECG Display] from the Physio tab and display vital signals (ECG).

Configure the following as necessary.

 Assign [DSD (ECG)] to direct switch, custom switch, or the function menu.

 Assign [DSD Speed] to the function menu.

 Assign [DSD Refresh] to direct switch, custom switch, or the function menu.

1 Displays B mode or Color Flow mode on single screen in real time.

2 Select [DSD (ECG)] on the touch panel or in the custom switches.

 The screen will switch to DSD dual screen. Real time is displayed on the left side, and slow-motion
on the right side.

110 | Image display ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Dynamic Slow-motion Display (D.S.D)

Changing the speed of slow motion display

 Select Playback Speed using [DSD Speed] in the function menu.

 Display the slow-motion image at the selected speed.

The set value is displayed on the upper right of the slow-motion image.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Real time ×1/3

DSD Speed 1/2

Real-time Slow motion
1/3

1/4

1/10

The dotted line reflects the refresh timing of the slow-motion image

Manually refreshing slow motion display

 Select [DSD Refresh] on the touch panel or in the custom switches.

 It will be refreshed according to the selected timing.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

Information

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Image display | 111
Dynamic Slow-motion Display (D.S.D)

3-7-2 Displaying in D.S.D (Time) Mode

Display slow motion with the set time unit.

Preliminary check The optional SOP-ARIETTA70-57 is required.

Configure the following as necessary.

 Assign [DSD (Time)] to direct switch, custom switch, or the function menu.

 Assign [DSD Speed] to the function menu.

 Assign [DSD Refresh Timing] to the function menu.

 Assign [DSD Refresh] to direct switch, custom switch, or the function menu.

1 Display the real time tomographic image (B mode or Color Flow mode) on single screen.

2 Select [DSD (Time)] on the touch panel or in the custom switches.

 The screen will switch to DSD dual screen. Real time is displayed on the left side, and slow-motion
on the right side.

Changing the speed of slow motion display

 Select Playback Speed using [DSD Speed] in the function menu.

 Display the slow-motion image at the selected speed.

The set value is displayed on the upper right of the slow-motion image.

Manually refreshing slow motion display

 Select [DSD Refresh] on the touch panel or in the custom switches.

 It will be refreshed according to the selected timing.

112 | Image display ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Dynamic Slow-motion Display (D.S.D)

Changing the refresh interval of slow-motion images

 Select [DSD Refresh Timing] from the function menu.

 Slow motion display will be refreshed for every selected time.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

Information

Switching the Screen

 Press the [Single] key.

 The slow-motion image is displayed on a single screen.

 Press the [Freeze/B Gain] key on the DSD dual screen.

 The finishing frame of the real-time image will be displayed in single screen.

When freeze is canceled, DSD dual screen will resume.

×1/3 ×1/3

Real-time Slow motion Slow motion

×1/3

Real-time Slow motion

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

Information

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Image display | 113
Panorama Display

3-8 Panorama Display

Move probe to wide range and display images in panorama.

Preliminary check The optional SOP-ARIETTA70-1 is required.

Assign [Panoramic View] to direct switch, custom switch, or the function menu.
Assign[Image Rotation] to the function menu if necessary.

This function enables you to observe a large area that would normally not fit in a single B mode screen.
The following actions are possible on the displayed panoramic image:

 Measurement as a B mode image. Refer to the separate "Measurement Section" about

measurements.

 Displaying body marks.

 Saving still images by pressing the [Store] key.

1 Display the real time tomographic image (also possible in Color Flow mode or PD mode).
NOTE: Turn off Compound and Trapezoidal Scan.

NOTE: In PD mode, turn [Directional] Off.

2 Adjusting the image.

 Adjust brightness so the center of the image NOTE: Once the image begins being acquired for

is at an appropriate brightness. Panoramic View, the flow area cannot be

adjusted.
 In color mode, configure a wide flow area.

3 Select [Panoramic View] on the touch panel or in the custom switches.

 Switches to tomographic image single screen.

4 Adjust the image.

For B mode images
Turn the [Freeze/B Gain] key to adjust.

For color flow or PD mode images

Turn the [CF] key to adjust.

114 | Image display ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Panorama Display

5 Acquire the images.

a Paint Echo jelly adequately to inspection
c
position. b d

b Press the [Update] key.

c Move the probe along the region of the

patient following the transducer's array
direction.
 When the size of the Panoramic View image
exceeds the screen size, the image size is
adjusted so it fits within the screen.

When bulging organs are scanned,

occasionally the images may be displayed
diagonally.

d Press the [Freeze/B Gain] key.

e Adjust the image orientation using [Image

Rotation].

Searching for an image

a Press the [Cine Search] key.

b Use the trackball or [Pointer] key to search.

 The searched B mode image is displayed.

Recapturing images

a Press the [Freeze/B Gain] key.

b Repeat steps a to e of procedure 5(above).

6 To turn off Panoramic View, again select [Panoramic View] on the touch panel or in the custom
switches and turn it Off.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

information

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Image display | 115
Modes that can be displayed for specific probes

3-9 Modes that can be displayed for specific probes

3-9-1 360° Radial display mode

This section explains image display with probes compatible with 360° display.
NOTE: Refer to the probe documentation about handling probes that are compatible with 360° radial display.

360° radial display mode is displayed as shown below.

A B

(1)

A: Screen display diagram. B: Probe. (1) Index mark.

The orientation mark of the probe will be displayed in the center of the image.
“PROX” or “DISTAL” will be displayed on the bottom right of the screen.

Rotating and inverting images

Rotate about the axis at the center of the B mode image, or invert the view direction.

Preliminary check Assign [Invert L/R] to a direct switch, custom switch or the function menu.
Assign [Image Rotation] to the function menu.

 Invert images using [Invert L/R].

 When “PROX” is displayed in the bottom right of the screen, it indicates that the image is from the
viewpoint of the patient's feet.

When “DISTAL” is displayed in the bottom right of the screen, it indicates that the image is from the
viewpoint of the patient's head.

 Rotates the image using [Image Rotation].

 Rotates the B mode using the center of the image as the axis.

NOTE: The options of [Image Rotation] vary with the probe.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

information

116 | Image display ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Modes that can be displayed for specific probes

Switching the display range of the B mode image

Switch the display width of the B mode image to 360° or 180°.

Preliminary check Assign the following necessary menus to direct switch, custom switch, or the function menu.

• [Top Display] • [Bottom Display] • [Left Display] • [Right Display]

 Select from [Top Display], [Bottom Display], [Left Display], [Right Display].

 Select the running menu with the orange light to go back to 360° display.

Display Example Display a square frame on the screen.

360° display [Top Display] [Bottom Display]

[Left Display] [Right Display]

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

information

Displaying in another mode

In 360° radial display, the same procedure as with a general probe can be used to display M mode, Color
Flow mode, or D mode.
In B/M mode, the M mode image for the M cursor position is displayed even if the M cursor is displayed
outside the range on the B mode image.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Image display | 117
Modes that can be displayed for specific probes

3-9-2 Brachytherapy
Display the target of Brachytherapy in a B mode image.
Brachytherapy is a type of radiation therapy to embed radial material (small radiation source) in the
prostate gland and annihilate cancer cells.
This instrument can perform the following operations.

I) Implanting a small radiation source using a grid to display position and set.

II) Display target set in I) when embedding that small source.

NOTE: Refer to the separate "Instruction for use Section" for probes compatible with Brachytherapy.

The grid and target display use the position as a guide.

There may be a blood vessel or other organ in the puncture path that is not visible on the screen.
Confirm the safety of puncture paths that aren't displayed on the image.

Configuring puncturing location for the small radiation sources

Display the grid and set puncturing location.

Preliminary check Assign [Brachytherapy] to the function menu.

1 Press the [Probe/Preset] key.

2 Switch application to “Prostate” from the function menu.

3 Display grids.
a Press the [Single] key or [B] key and switch to
transverse image (single screen) of prostate
gland.

b Select [Brachytherapy].
 The puncturing coordinate list will be
displayed.

c Select [Grid].
Changing the display type of the grid

Select the [Grid Type] multi rotary encoder on the

touch panel and change the display type.

118 | Image display ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Modes that can be displayed for specific probes

4 Set the puncture location for the small radiation source within 30 points.
a Use the trackball to move the mark to the
puncture location.

b Press the [Enter] key.

 The puncturing coordinates will be displayed
in the puncture coordinate list.

c Repeat steps a to b.

Adding new points to the puncture coordinate list

a Turn [Table Display] On.

 The puncturing location list will be displayed.

b Use the trackball to move the mark to the

location to add.

c Select [Add].

d Move the highlight on the puncture location

list to the displayed point of insertion.

e Press the [Enter] key.

Deleting registered points from the puncture coordinate list

a Turn [Table Display] On.

 The puncturing location list will be displayed.

b Select [Delete].

c Move the highlight on the puncture

coordinate list to the display position to
delete.

d Press the [Enter] key.

 The message “Memory data will be deleted.”
is displayed.

e Select [OK].

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

information

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Image display | 119
Modes that can be displayed for specific probes

Displaying the target location for inserting small radiation sources

This will display the puncture target location for implanting small radiation sources.

Preliminary check Assign [Brachytherapy] to the function menu.

1 Press the [Probe/Preset] key to switch the application to “Prostate”.

2 Display target.
a Press the [Single] key or [B] key and switch to
transverse image (single screen) of prostate
gland.

b Select [Brachytherapy].

c Select [Target].

 The first coordinates of the puncture coordinate list will be highlighted. The indicating the target
position is displayed on the screen.

3 Press the [Enter] key to display the next target.

 The following coordinates of the puncture coordinate list will be highlighted. The is displayed at
the highlighted target position on the screen.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

information

120 | Image display ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Modes that can be displayed for specific probes

3-9-3 Displaying in real time biplane

This will display real time image in 2 cross-sections in biplane probe.

Preliminary check Please refer to separate "Instruction for use Section" for the appropriate probe.
Assign [Real-time Biplane] to direct switch, custom switch, or the function menu.

1 Check the probe connections.

2 Press the [Probe/Preset] key and switch probe.

3 Select [Real-time Biplane].

 This will switch to B mode dual screen.

Left screen Right screen

Vertical section Lateral section
(indicates observation of the lateral section (indicates observation of the vertical section
and displays a cross section line) and displays a cross section line)

The cross section line is a place where two scanning planes intersect and it will be displayed up and
down as an arrow on the image.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

information

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Image display | 121
Modes that can be displayed for specific probes

3-9-4 OMNI Mode

Fix the transducer of a 3D endovaginal probe temporarily at any angle, and display the tomographic
image at its position.

Preliminary check Please refer to the separate "Instruction for use Section" for the appropriate probe.
Assign [Omni Plane Angle Setting] to the function menu.

1 Press the [Probe/Preset] key to switch the application to 3D endovaginal probe.

2 Press the [B] key to switch to the B mode image (single screen).
NOTE: Exit 3D/4D.

3 Set transducer angle using [Omni Plane Angle Setting].

 The B mode image taken from the adjusted angle is displayed.

The angular direction of the transducer will be displayed as follows in the top left screen if either the
[Rotary Plane Mark Display] or [Rotary Plane Angle Display] in the B category of the Region Data
Setting is .

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

information

122 | Image display ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Modes that can be displayed for specific probes

3-9-5 Displaying the assist line

Displays a line according to the 5mm sensation scale on top of the tomographic image in a longitudinal
direction for probe head case.

Preliminary check Please refer to separate "Instruction for use Section" for the appropriate probe.
Assign [Assist Line] to direct switch, custom switch, or the function menu.

Use the assist lines to help with body surface marking. This function is not to be used for any other application.
The assist lines are not intended for finding accurate positional information. They cannot be used for measurement
applications. Do not use this as a puncture guideline.

1 Display tomographic image, single screen.

NOTE: End HI Zoom and Pan Zoom.

2 Select [Assist Line].

 The message: “An assist line will appear. Use it as assistance in marking. DO NOT use it as a puncture
guide line.” will be displayed. Select [OK] to display assist line.

Display Example A line will be displayed in 5mm intervals from the tomographic focal line.

Off On
Assist Line Assist Line

To hide the assist line, select [Assist Line] again and turn it Off.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

information

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Image display | 123
Picture in Picture (PinP) mode

3-10 Picture in Picture (PinP) mode

Captures optical images from an endoscope or laparoscope and displays both the ultrasound image
and the optical image.
Picture in Picture (PinP) mode is a function to capture optical images from an endoscope or laparoscope
and display both the ultrasound image and the optical image. The ultrasound image and optical image
can be displayed simultaneously or alternately.
The size of the optical image can be switched to suit the purpose.
NOTE: The optional SOP-ARIETTA70-63 and analogue video signal input-output unit (EU-9167) are necessary in PinP
mode.

124 | Image display ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Picture in Picture (PinP) mode

3-10-1 Displaying the PinP window

Display optical image on screen.

1 Select [PinP] on the System tab.

2 Turn the [PinP Window] On.

 The PinP window will be displayed.

Changing the size of the PinP window

1 Select [PinP] on the System tab.

2 Select the size.

NOTE: The PinP window size [half] cannot be selected in M mode, D mode, or real time biplane.

Moving the position of the small PinP window

1 Select [PinP] on the System tab.

2 Select the position.

 The PinP window will move to the selected position.

Saving the image of the PinP window

The PinP window image can be saved, regardless of whether the ultrasound image is frozen or in real
time.
Still images can only be saved in RGB format, while video can only be saved in Video Clip format.
Refer to the "Outputting images" chapter in this guide.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Image display | 125
Displaying the puncture guideline

3-11 Displaying the puncture guideline

A puncture guideline is displayed on the B mode image to determine the direction in which the
puncturing needle should be inserted.

Preliminary check Assign [Puncture Adapter Select] to the function menu.

Assign [Puncture Depth Display], [Puncture Guide Line] and [Puncture Angle Select] to direct switch,
custom switch, or the function menu as necessary.

Check if the puncture adapter model name on the screen matches the currently used puncture adapter.
When using the probe and puncture adapter that have multiple insertion angle, check if the insertion angle of the
puncture adapter and the angle set on the screen match.

Puncture guidelines should be used as a guide for the directionality of puncturing needle insertions.
Verify the bending and direction of the puncturing needle with the needle echo that is displayed on the monitor.
There may be a blood vessel or other organ in the puncture path that is not visible on the screen.
Confirm the safety of puncture paths that aren't displayed on the monitor.

Refer to the probe documentation for information on specifications, handling and storage for puncture probes
and puncture adapters.

1 Press the [B] key to switch to the B mode image (single screen).

2 Selecting the [Puncture Adapter Select] function menu.

 The puncture guideline will be displayed.

3 Use the multi rotary encoder corresponding to [Puncture Angle Select] on the touch panel to
select puncture angle or the distance from the ultrasonic irradiation area to the puncture guide
line.

4 Displaying puncture depth.

a Select [Puncture Depth Display] on the touch
panel or in the custom switches.

b Use the trackball to move the arrow.

5 To turn off Puncture Guide Line view, select [Puncture Guide Line] on the touch panel or in the
custom switches.

126 | Image display ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Displaying the puncture guideline

3-11-1 Displaying Multiple Puncture Guide Lines

For EUP-B514

1 Select [Puncture] in the function menu to display a puncture guideline.

2 Select [Puncture Adapter Select] from the function menu.

 The following dialogue box is displayed.

3 Select the Puncture Adapter.

4 Use the [Puncture Disp. Pattern] multi rotary encoder to switch between puncture guide line
patterns.
 The number of puncture guide lines change. Or the slit interval changes.

0 0 13

If [Puncture Disp. Pattern] is “0”. If [Puncture Disp. Pattern] is “0 - 13”.

5 Use the [Puncture Angle Select] multi rotary encoder to switch between active puncture guide
lines.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Image display | 127
Displaying the puncture guideline

For CL4416R

1 Select [Puncture] in the function menu to display a puncture guideline.

2 Use the [Puncture Disp. Pattern] multi rotary encoder to switch between puncture guide line
patterns.
 The number of puncture guide lines change.

50
45
40
35
30 30
25
20
15
10

If [Puncture Disp. Pattern] is “Single”. If [Puncture Disp. Pattern] is “Multi”.

3 Use the [Puncture Angle Select] multi rotary encoder to switch between active puncture guide
lines.

128 | Image display ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Needle Emphasis

3-12 Needle Emphasis

Improves the visibility of the puncture needle echo.

Preliminary check Refer to the separate "Instruction for use" for information on compatible probes.
If required, assign the following functions to a direct switch, custom switch or the function menu.

 [Needle Emphasis]

 [Angle Select (NE)]

 [Angle Reverse (NE)]

 [Puncture Link (NE)]

(1) Graphic Line 1

(2) (2) Graphic Line 2

(1)

It is recommend to use the puncture needle within the solid line section in the figure above.
If the puncture needle is inserted beyond Graphic Line 1, the Needle Emphasis effect is not obtained.

Be careful not to mistake it for the puncture needle echo.

In certain cases, body tissue that is parallel to Graphic Line 2 may be emphasized.

Note that the Graphic Line 2 are different from the puncture guide line.

1 Press the [B] key.

 Switches to B mode image (1 screen).

2 Select [Puncture] from the function menu.

 The puncture guide line appears.

3 Select [Needle Emphasis].

 Displays Graphic Line 2 (Green dotted lines).

The closer the puncture angle of the puncturing needle is to the Graphic Line 2, the better the
visibility of the puncture needle echo will be.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Image display | 129
Needle Emphasis

3-12-1 Setting Graphic Line 1 as Perpendicular to the Puncture

Guideline as Possible

1 Select [Puncture] in the function menu.

2 Set [Puncture Link (NE)] in the touch panel to On.

 Displays Graphic Line 1 as perpendicular to the puncture guideline as possible.

3-12-2 Adjusting the Graphic Line 2 Angle

1 Select [Puncture] in the function menu.

2 Use the multi rotary encoder for [Angle Select (NE)] on the touch panel to adjust the angle.
NOTE: The maximum angle value varies depending on the probe.

3-12-3 Reversing the Angle of Graphic Line 2

1 Select [Puncture] in the function menu.

2 Select [Angle Reverse (NE)] on the touch panel.

130 | Image display ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Physiological signal

3-13 Physiological signal

Attach the ECG cable, which is connected to the main unit, to the patient, and display the physiological
signals.

This instrument can display the following physiological signals.

 ECG (Electrocardiogram)

 PCG (Phonocardiogram)

 Pulse (Pulse Wave)

 Resp (Breathing)

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Image display | 131
Physiological signal

3-13-1 Displaying the physiological signals

ECG waveform

1 Use the Physio tab to switch the [ECG Display] to On.

 The ECG waveform will be displayed.

When the ECG waveform is displayed, the instrument detects the R wave and calculates the heart
rate.

The heart rate is displayed on the screen as “HR 120”. If it is displayed as “HR***”, the HR range is
outside of the display range (HR 30 to HR 500).

R wave of ECG cannot be detected 5 sec or more. “Detection error: Cannot detect ECG R-wave.” will
blink and be displayed. Check to see that the ECG electrodes are connected correctly to the patient.

2 Use the Physio tab to adjust the ECG waveform.

 Adjust sensitivity using [ECG Sensitivity].

 Switch automatic adjustment of sensitivity in

[ECG Auto Sensitivity].

 Configure the Wall Motion Reduction using

[ECG Filter].

 Vertically move the display position of the

ECG waveform using [ECG Position].

 Highlight the ECG waveform using [Invert

ECG Display].

PCG, Pulse, Resp Waveform

1 Turn On the menu of waveforms to display in the Physio tab.

 PCG turns [PCG Display] On.

 Pulse turns [Pulse Display] On.

 Resp turns [Resp. Display] On.

2 Use the Physio tab to adjust the waveform.

Adjusting the sensitivity

 PCG is adjusted in [PCG Sensitivity].  Resp is adjusted in [Resp. Sensitivity].

 Pulse is adjusted in [Pulse Sensitivity].

132 | Image display ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Physiological signal

3-13-2 Detecting the R-R interval

Sectors with equal and continuous intervals between one R-wave and the next are detected from Cine
Memory.

Sectors with equal and continuous intervals between one R-wave and the next are detected from Cine
Memory. Measurement can be done in detected images.

1 Press the [B] key to switch to the B mode image (single screen).
With dual screen
In B/M mode, make M mode active (FAM mode cannot be used).

In B/D mode, make D mode active.

2 On the Physio tab, turn [ECG Display] On, and display the ECG.

3 Once a good image has been obtained, press the [Freeze/B Gain] key.

4 On the Physio tab, turn [R-R Detection] On.

 The detected sector changes color. Information is also displayed about the detected sector.

5 Run cine back to the detected sector.

 Use the trackball to search.

6 To turn R-R Detection off, turn [R-R Detection] under the Physio tab Off.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Image display | 133
Physiological signal

3-13-3 Displaying the heart rate stability

Judges a location where the heart rate is stable.

The heartbeat is judged to be stable if the following conditions are satisfied.

 The result of comparison between the average heart rate over four heartbeats and the most recent
heart rate is within the allowable range

 The result of comparison between the average heart rate over four heartbeats and a previous heart
rate is within the allowable range

 The rate of change between two consecutive heartbeats is within the allowable range

1 Turn on [H.R. Stability Display] under the Physio tab.

2 Use the Physio tab to set the allowable range.

 [H.R. Stability Display (Average)]

Set the allowable range for comparison with

the average heart rate over four recent
heartbeats.

 [H.R. Stability Display (Continuous)]

Set the allowable range for the rate of

change between two consecutive
heartbeats.

 If the latest heartbeat is within the above allowable range, that heartbeat is judged to be stable. The
heart rate in the upper right of the screen is highlighted.

Judgment example When [H.R. Stability Display (Average)] is 10% and [H.R. Stability Display (Continuous)] is 20%
When the average heart rate of the previous four heartbeats was 100, the heart rate of the previous 1
heartbeat was 110, and the heart rate of the latest 1 heartbeat was 105.

HR 100

110 105

In this case, the allowable range relative to the previous 4 heartbeats is 90 to 110. Therefore, both the
previous heartbeat and the latest heartbeat are within the allowable range.
In this case, the allowable range for two consecutive heartbeats is 88 to 132. Therefore, the latest
heartbeat is within the allowable range.
The two conditions are satisfied, so the latest heartbeat is judged to be stable.

134 | Image display ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Cine Memory

3-14 Cine Memory

Plays the image up to immediately before freezing.

Cine memory is the memory that temporarily stores image information. Use this memory to playback
images and display using manual (Cine Search).

 Video of the image in the specified mode is recorded continuously and seamlessly.
On playback, all the recorded images can be played in a continuous loop, or played forward or back,
a frame at a time.

 If the ECG is displayed, the ECG waveform is recorded simultaneously with the video.

Recording to cine memory

The image depicted on the screen is also recorded to cine memory at all times, even without any specific
instruction to do so. If conditions such as display depth and display angle are switched, data in cine
memory is cleared, and then recording resumes. Once the cine memory capacity is exceeded, images
are deleted in order of age.
Image recording stops when freeze is used. When freeze is canceled, data in cine memory is cleared.
Number of recorded images
The number of frames that can be recorded in cine memory varies according to the probe, mode, display
depth, and other factors.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Image display | 135
Cine Memory

3-14-1 Making the frozen image active

 For single screen, press the [Single] key.

 When the display is switched from dual screen or Quad to single screen, the displayed Cine switches.

Switching is not possible if the Cine Memory Division is “Off”.

Use Cine Memory Division under the Cine tab in the presets ([Preset Setup > Region > General]) to
change it.

1 2 1 2
Active

Switching Cine from horizontal dual screen display to single screen display

 For dual screen, press the [Dual] key.

 The active screens will be switched while still on dual screen display.

 To display on quad screen select [Quad] from direct switch.

 The active screens will be switched while still on quad screen display.

3-14-2 Switching with dual screen display of the tomographic image

and sweep image (M mode or D mode)

 For dual screen, press the [Dual] key.

 For single screen, press the [Single] key.

 Switching the screen.

 Press the [Single] key to switch the active

mode to single screen display.

 Press the [Single] key to switch to another

screen in single screen.

 Select [Full M/D] to switch to single screen Full M/D

display of the sweep image.

 Press the [Dual] key to go back from single

screen to dual screen.

136 | Image display ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Cine Memory

3-14-3 Playing Back Cine Memory Images

Use the steps below to play back images after they have been frozen.
Moving tomographic image frames back and forward in cine memory image play is called “searching.”
In a sweep image such as an M mode or D mode image, playing the sequence direction in reverse is
called “scrolling”.

Searching or Scrolling in Single Screen

1 Press the [Freeze/B Gain] key in real time tomographic image (single screen).

2 Press the [Cine Search] key to turn it On.

When the freeze mode function for the track ball is set to “Search”
Go to step 3 instead of pressing the [Cine Search] key.

To select “Search” set Trackball Priority under the Preset ([Preset Setup > Region > General]) Operation
tab.

3 Move the trackball to the right or left. Alternatively, turn the [Pointer] key.

Searching or scrolling in dual screen

Search and scroll with double screen display of B/M mode etc.

1 The [Freeze/B Gain] key allows the image to be frozen.

2 Press the [Cine Search] key to turn it On.

When the freeze mode function for the track ball is set to “Search”
Go to step 3 instead of pressing the [Cine Search] key.

To select “Search” set Trackball Priority under the Preset ([Preset Setup > Region > General]) Operation
tab.

3 Search, or scroll.

 Roll the trackball left or right for the active

image.

 For the inactive image, turn the [Pointer] key.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Image display | 137
Cine Memory

3-14-4 Continuous playback of tomographic images

Use the steps below to continuously play back tomographic images stored in cine memory.

1 The [Freeze/B Gain] key allows the image to be frozen.

2 Press the [Cine Search] key and turn it On.

3 Roll the trackball upward to playback the images continuously.

To change the playback speed
The loop playback speed increases by rotating the trackball further upward. The loop playback speed
decreases by rotating the trackball further downward.

Pausing playback
Roll the trackball left or right.

Continuously playing within a chosen interval

1 The [Freeze/B Gain] key allows the image to be frozen.

2 Press the [Cine Search] key to turn it On.

3 Set the playback range.

a Display the ending frame for continuous
playback using the trackball.

b Press the [Enter] key.

c Display the starting frame for continuous

playback using the trackball.

d Press the [Enter] key.

4 Roll the trackball upward to playback the images continuously.

To change the playback speed
The loop playback speed increases by rotating the trackball further upward. The loop playback speed
decreases by rotating the trackball further downward.

Pausing playback
Roll the trackball left or right.

138 | Image display ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Cine Memory

Playing the tomographic image continuously on dual screen or Quad

Preliminary check Assign [Playback Mode] to the function menu.

For dual screen or quad screen tomographic images, all images are played continuously and
simultaneously.

1 The [Freeze/B Gain] key allows the image to be frozen.

2 Press the [Cine Search] key to turn it On.

3 Set the playback range.

a Display the playback end frame using the
trackball and press the [Enter] key.

b Display the playback start frame using the

trackball and press the [Enter] key.

4 Select [Playback Mode] in the function menu and set synchronized playback.

 “Long” images play over the same time as the

Synchronize to long images of play time. longest image.

Other images stop on the last frame until the  “Free Run”
longest image resets. Play each image and asynchronize.
 “Short”

Synchronize to short images of play time.

Other images are reset at the same time as
the shortest image.

 “Align”

Synchronize to long images of play time.

Playback speed is varied so that other

5 Roll the trackball upward to playback the images continuously.

To change the playback speed
The loop playback speed increases by rotating the trackball further upward. The loop playback speed
decreases by rotating the trackball further downward.

Pausing playback
Roll the trackball left or right.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

information

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Image display | 139
Cine Memory

140 | Image display ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 4 Outputting images

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Outputting images | 141
Outputting images

4-1 Outputting images

Output data being displayed such as images and measurement results.

Store and print images and measurement results displayed during examination.
Please refer to "review" in this guide for stored data list, replay, print and backup.
Images can be stored in any of the below.

 Hard disk device

 USB connection media

 CD-R Buffer

 DVD (DVD-R AM, HDD, CD-R)

 Network

142 | Outputting images ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Outputting images

4-1-1 Notes regarding image records and storage media

To ensure that the system as a whole conforms to electrical safety standard IEC 60601-1-1, this
instrument does not support commercially available drives. Please use the instrument's internal drives.
Please note the following when using the following storage or recording media.

 USB connection media

– Use a commercially available memory device of USB mass storage class, equipped with an access lamp.
Memory devices equipped with encryption or authentication functions cannot be used.

– Some devices may not be usable depending on their physical dimensions. Confirm that the device can be
connected to the instrument's USB connector.

– Remove any straps that may be attached to the USB memory device. It may hamper instrument operation
by getting tangled with the probe cable.

– Do not remove USB connecting media (data transmission) while USB connecting media access lamp is
blinking. The data being recorded may be damaged.

 Printer, DVD (DVD-RAM, CD-R)

– It can be difficult to open and close DVD-RAM and/or CD-R tray to pull out printed sheets depending on
the position of monitor and control panel. Please readjust position of monitor and control panel in this
case.

– Applying excessive vibration to the drive while a disk is still inside may result in damage to the disk.
Remove the disk from the drive when moving the instrument.

– DVD-RAM and CD-R can record and retrieve.

When recording to DVD-RAM, use media that conform to the DVD-RAM Ver. 2.1 standard. Media with
capacity of 4.7 GB (single-sided) or 9.4 GB (double-sided) (without cartridge) can be used for recording and
reading.

– CD-R Buffer

This is internal storage space used when writing to a CD-R. To write to a CD-R disk from this CD-R buffer,
select [Burning CD] from the Find, Tile View screen.

– Network server

Images are sent in DICOM format. No other formats are used for sending.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Outputting images | 143
Saving a still image

4-2 Saving a still image

Use the steps below to save images during an examination, or the displayed screen, as a still image.

Preliminary check Enter a patient ID. Images cannot be saved if the patient ID has not been input.

1 Press the [Freeze/B Gain] key to freeze.

2 Refer to the next item and change storage area and format if necessary.

3 Press the [Store] key.

 Thumbnails of saved images are displayed in the thumbnail area.

The images captured in screen will be stored in case of playing images in hard disk device and/or
DICOM images in media and storing in DICOM format.

144 | Outputting images ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Saving a still image

4-2-1 Change storage format and storage area of still image

Change storage format and storage area of still image

 Use the Store Media in the Common Tab in the preset ([Preset Setup > Filing]).
Store Media
Options Store Media
“HDD” Hard disk device

“USB” USB connection media

“CD-R Buffer” CD-R Buffer

“DVD” DVD drive

“NET (DICOM)” To send to the network:*1

*1. Network authentication may be required when sending.

 Change storage format.

When the Store Media is a hard disk device
Use [Data Format (Still)] in the Common Tab in the preset ([Preset Setup > Filing]).

Options Type of data

“RGB” Color image

“RGB+Raw” Add a private format*1 to a color image.

For B mode double screen or Quad screen (including Color Flow mode), M/PW, Monitor Mode,
Elasto mode (during Frame Average operation), RT3D, Panoramic Image, and stress data, images
are saved in RGB form.

*1. Information used by the instrument for analysis.

When the Store Media is not a hard disk device

Use [Format Type (Still)] in the Common Tab in the preset ([Preset Setup > Filing]).

Options Storage format

“DICOM” DICOM format*1
“JPEG” JPEG format

“BMP” Bitmap format

“TIFF” TIFF format

*1. Change type of data in [Data Format (Still)].

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Outputting images | 145
Saving moving images

4-3 Saving moving images

Store video during examination.

There are three methods to store video. Use Acquisition Mode in the Common tab in the preset ([Preset
Setup > Filing]).

 “Pre (Time)”, “Pre (ECG)”

Press [Store] key, go back to set time and store image.

 “Post (Time)”, “Post (ECG)”

Press [Store] key and store set time image.

 “Manual”
Store videos from pressing the [Store] key until pressing [Store] key again.

Videos can be stored in RGB+Raw and/or Video Clip formats. In RGB+Raw mode, DICOM images from
B/M, M, B/PW, PW, B/CW, CW, B/M/PW and M/PW mode can't be saved.
Items related to storage format and storage
Storage format RGB+Raw Video Clip
Storage Area Device Hard Disk Device Hard Disk
USB Connection Media
CD-R Buffer
Storable Display Mode Only tomographical images on 1 screen (B Possible in all modes.
mode, CF mode).
Active screen of tomographic images in
dual screen mode (B mode, CF mode).
Color flow mode image in Dual CF.
D.S.D. mode is not possible.
Pre (Time), Pre (ECG) ×

Post (Time), Post (ECG)

Automatic Replay ×

Manual

The Acquisition progress bar appears in the seek bar display area only in CHI mode. For details, refer to
the separate "CHI" section.
Mask Patient Information
Patient information can be masked in case of storing videos in media other than hard disk devices.
Turn On the Teaching File (Video Clip) or Teaching File (Net) in the preset ([Preset Setup > Filing]) to save
the moving images with the patient ID and patient name masked. Set applicable items On in case of
masking the subject (“Age”), (“Sex”), (“Masking Item Hosp. & Sonographer Name”).

Reference Editing Filing Parameters → p.342

information Assigning functions → p.333

146 | Outputting images ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Saving moving images

4-3-1 Store set time videos: Post Time/Post ECG

Preliminary check Assign [Acquisition Mode] to the function menu and set “Post (Time)” or “Post (ECG)”.

 Assign [Time Cycle] to the function menu for “Post (Time)”.

 Assign [ECG Cycle] to the function menu for “Post (ECG)”.

NOTE: If image storage format is RGB+Raw, you can replay.

1 Press [Store] key in real time image.

When confirm target range before saving
Turn On Auto Playback in the Common Tab in the preset ([Preset Setup > Filing]).

 After pressing the key, the time video set in the [Time Cycle] or [ECG Cycle] will be stored.

4-3-2 The moving image is saved going back to the time set: Pre
Time/Pre ECG
Preliminary check Set the following.
Assign [Acquisition Mode] to the function menu and set “Pre (Time)” or “Pre (ECG)”.

 Assign [Time Cycle] to the function menu for “Pre (Time)”.

 Assign [ECG Cycle] to the function menu for “Pre (ECG)”.

NOTE: If image storage format is RGB+Raw, you can replay.

1 Press the [Store] key with real-time image.

When confirm target range before saving
Turn On Auto Playback in the Common Tab in the preset ([Preset Setup > Filing]).

 After pressing the key, the time video set in the [Time Cycle] or [ECG Cycle] will be stored.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Outputting images | 147
Saving moving images

4-3-3 Store videos at arbitrary time: Manual

Press the [Store] key once to start saving moving images and then press the [Store] key again to end.

Preliminary check Assign [Acquisition Mode] to the function menu and specify “Manual”.

1 Press the [Store] key with real-time image.

 Start saving.

2 Press the [Store] key again to stop saving.

 End saving.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

information

Save data in RGB+Raw Format for the Same Segment as the Stored Video Clip

Data for the same segment that was saved as a video clip is also saved in RGB+Raw format.

Preliminary check Set the following.

 Distribute [Acquisition Mode] to function menu and set to “Manual ”.

 Distribute [Data Format (Movie)] to function menu and set to “VideoClip”.

 Turn On Auto Playback in the Common Tab in the preset ([Preset Setup > Filing]).

1 Press the [Store] key with real-time image.

 Start saving.

2 Press the [Store] key again to stop saving.

 Finish saving and freeze.

3 Perform loop playback.

a Turn [Cine Search] key On.

b Roll the trackball up.

4 Press the [Store] key.

 The loop play scope (the same range as videos stored in Video Clip) will be stored in RGB+Raw
format.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

information

148 | Outputting images ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Saving moving images

4-3-4 Store videos at arbitrary range after freeze

Store tomographical images of loop play range as videos during freeze.

Store images imported to cine memory up until just after freeze in tomographical image 1 screen (B
mode, CF mode and/or Dual CF mode) as videos.

1 Press the [Freeze/B Gain] key to freeze.

2 Select playback range and store.

a Press the [Cine Search] key.

b Display the beginning frame using the

trackball and press the [Enter] key.

c Display finish frame and press [Enter] key.

 The selected zone will be stored.

3 Roll the trackball up.

 Start continuous play.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Outputting images | 149
Recording on a HD Video Recorder

4-4 Recording on a HD Video Recorder

The following HD Video Recorders can be connected to this instrument.

Refer to the instruction manual that comes with the HD Video Recorder for information on discs that can
be recorded and played, handling precautions, storage, and maintenance.
Table 1: HD Video Recorders that can be connected to this instrument
Model DVD drive Image format Others
HVO-500MD None MP4, AVCHD MP4:Playable on PCs
AVCHD: Playable on commercially
available, AVCHD-compatible DVD
players
HVO-550MD Yes MP4, AVCHD MP4:Playable on PCs
AVCHD: Playable on commercially
available, AVCHD-compatible DVD
players
Can be recorded or copied to a DVD-R*1
disc

*1. A CD-R can be recorded upon once. It is suitable for making permanent recordings.

Do not attempt to repair, disassemble or modify a HD Video Recorder.

Our service engineers install the HD Video Recorder when the instrument is delivered.
Ask us to handle any repairs.

In the following cases, refer to the documentation for the HD Video Recorder.
• Finalizing errors
• Unforeseen power outages during operation, etc.

 To play back DVDs recorded on this device on DVD players or other DVD devices, it may be
necessary to "finalize" the disk.

 Note that we accept no liability whatsoever for loss of data through unforeseen accidents,
malfunctions or operator error. Be sure to back up important data.

 Press the [Power] key only after making sure that the access lamp on the HD Video Recorder is off.
Pressing the [Power] key while the access lamp is on or blinking could damage the drive, the HD
Video Recorder, the disc or the data on the disc.

150 | Outputting images ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Recording on a HD Video Recorder

4-4-1 Recording on a HD Video Recorder

This function records data on the HD Video Recorder (HDD).

Preliminary Check The patient ID and name are mandatory entries.

To simultaneously record on a DVD-R, check the external destination setting in the storage settings.
NOTE: For information on how to operate from the HD Video Recorder, see the documentation that came with the
HD Video Recorder.

1 Select [EXT] on the touch panel.

 The Recorder Control menu appears on the touch panel.

2 To simultaneously record on a DVD-R, select [Eject&Finalize] on the touch panel and insert a
DVD-R disc.

3 Select [EXT] on the touch panel.

 Display switches from HD Video Recorder to the examination screen.

4 Press the [REC] key.

 Recording starts. The ( ) mark appears in the status area during recording.

The patient ID and other patient data are sent to the HD Video Recorder when recording starts.

NOTE: Do not turn off the power of the instrument while recording is in progress. If the power is turned off, there is
a possibility that all files may be destroyed.

5 Press the [REC] key.

 Pauses recording. ( ) mark indicating the pause is displayed in the status area.

The name "Chapter 1" is added to the recorded clip.

Pressing the [REC] key again restarts recording.

Pauses recording and adds a chapter number each time the recording is restarted. Chapter numbers
increase until patient data is changed. When patient data is changed, chapter numbers are
reassigned staring from Chapter 1.

These chapter numbers are used as an index for selecting images to playback.

To eject a simultaneously recorded DVD-R, select [Eject&Finalize] on the touch panel.

Then the “Do you want to finalize your DVD-R before ejecting?” dialog box appears. To finalize,
select “Yes.”.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Outputting images | 151
Recording on a HD Video Recorder

4-4-2 Playing back images stored in the HDD of the HD Video Recorder

1 Select [EXT] on the touch panel.

 The Recorder Control menu appears on the touch panel.

2 Select an image from the recording list screen.

 Plays back the selected image.

If the recording list does not appear, select [List] on the touch panel.

Touch panel menu for playback

Menu Contents
[EXT] Opens the recording list.
A blue screen is displayed when the HD Video Recorder is not selected.
[Play] Plays back an image.
[Stop] Stops playback
[Pause] Pauses playback.
[REW] Rewinds images.
[FF] Fast-forwards playback images.
[Frame Back] Displays the previous frame when playback is paused.
[Frame Forward] Displays the next frame when playback is paused.
[Play Speed] Changes the playback speed between “x1/16”, “x1/8”,“ x1”,“ x2”, “x4” or x20.
[Eject&Finalize] Opens or closes the disc tray. (HVO-550MD only)
If the DVD-R is not finalized, finalize it before you eject it.
[Patient Search] Locates patient IDs.
[Chapter Search] Skips to the start of each chapter in the selected image file.
[List] Opens the recording list.
[Audio Volume] Changes the volume. “0” is mute.

152 | Outputting images ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Recording on a HD Video Recorder

4-4-3 Copying, deleting or protecting data stored to the internal HDD

of the HD Video Recorder

1 Select [EXT] on the touch panel.

 The recording list appears.

If the recording list does not appear, select [List] on the touch panel.

2 Select the [Play] button.

 The function screen appears.

3 Select the [Save to] button, [Delete] button or the [Protect] button.

4 Select an image.
To select all images, select the [Select All] button.

To deselect all images, select the [Clear All] button.

5 [Select the Execute] button.

 The selected process is performed.

A dialog box for selecting an external destination appears when [Send to] is selected.

Select a destination and select the [Execute] button to copy a selected image to the specified
destination.

6 When processing is completed, press the [EXT] button on the touch panel.
To eject a DVD-R
Select [Eject&Finalize] on the touch panel.

Then the “Do you want to finalize your DVD-R before ejecting?” dialog box appears. To finalize, select
“Yes.”.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Outputting images | 153
To print an image

4-5 To print an image

Use the steps below to print displayed images on a local printer or DICOM printer.

 Print a image displayed in real-time.

a Display an optimal image in real-time.

b Press the [Print] key.

 The image shown when the key was pressed is printed.

 Print a frozen image.

a Search or scroll for an optimal image.

b Press the [Print] key.

 The displayed image is printed.

154 | Outputting images ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 5 Review

Replay the images stored on hard disk instrument and save to

connected USB media and DVD. Images that have been saved
to a USB or DVD can be played back as well as saved to other
media.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Review | 155
Playback Image Display

5-1 Playback Image Display

There are five options for playing images stored in the hard disk instrument or connected USB media.

I) Examination Screen (Current View)

In this option, saved images are displayed as thumbnails on the real-time scan image display screen.

II) Comparative Screen (Image Compare)

In this option, saved images and the real-time scan images are displayed side-by-side.

III) Full Screen Display (Full Screen View)

In this option, a selected saved image is displayed at the same size as when it was saved.

IV) Tile Display (Tile View)

In this option, saved images are lined up side-by-side on a single screen.

V) Search Screen (Find View)

In this option, saved images from the instrument hard disk or USB media can be searched by things
such as the date of examination and patient ID. The examination results are displayed as icon
images in a list.

156 | Review ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Displaying a selected image: Full Screen Display

5-2 Displaying a selected image: Full Screen Display

Plays back the selected image in full screen.

On full screen display, an image selected from the normal search screen is displayed on a single screen.
A Playback Mark is displayed on thumbnails of saved images in the thumbnail area.

5-2-1 Displaying Images from Thumbnails

Images can be selected and displayed from the displayed thumbnail area to the left or right of the
screen.

 Move the pointer over the target thumbnail and press the [Enter] key twice.
 This will display the image on a single screen.

 Displaying an Image Using the Touch Panel Menu.

Assign [Full Screen View] to direct switch, custom switch, or the function menu.

a Press the [Pointer] key.

b Move the pointer onto the target thumbnail.

c Press the [Enter] key.

d Select [Full Screen View].

 Selecting from the Pop-Up Menu

a Press the [Pointer] key.

b Move the pointer onto the target thumbnail.

c Press the [UNDO] key.

d Select [Full Screen This Image].

Display Example The selected thumbnail is displayed on a single screen.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

Information

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Review | 157
Displaying a selected image: Full Screen Display

Switching the Screen

 The ultrasonic image from the current examination can be displayed.

Assign [Current View] to direct switch, custom switch, or the function menu.

 Displaying Thumbnail Tiles.

Assign [Tile View] to direct switch, custom switch, or the function menu in order to select them.

Reference Assigning functions → p.333

Information

Thumbnail Area

The thumbnail area is composed of thumbnail images and the control menu.
Only the saved images of the patient being examined are displayed as thumbnails. The most recent
saved images will be displayed in order starting from the top left.

A B

A: Thumbnail images (Left layout is 4×1, right layout is 8×2)

B: Control Menu

Switching the Thumbnail Image Display

 Switch the thumbnail layout using the Control Menu Layout column.

 Switching the thumbnail page.

 Select ▲▼ on the right-hand side of Page

on the control menu.

 Turn the [Pointer] key

 Select the Study column from the control menu to search for images from past examinations.
You can select from images from the current exam as well as from a “Custom” exam ID (all images will
be from the same patient ID).

158 | Review ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Displaying a selected image: Full Screen Display

Reloading Images

If devices or media have been updated, then you will need to search again for the images.

 Select [Reload] from the control menu.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Review | 159
Displaying a selected image: Full Screen Display

Thumbnail Information

The following icons will be displayed on thumbnails displayed in the examination screen thumbnail
areas, tile displays, and examination screens.

A C

B D
 A: Image type icon

Still Image (RGB Format) Still Image (RGB+Raw Format)

Video (Video Clip Format) Video (RGB+Raw Format)

3D Data (Volume Data) DICOM SR File

Stress Echo Image File saved in Stress Echo State

File with Position Information DICOM Data Created with CT Modality

DICOM Data Created with MRI Modality Saved File in RVS State

ET waveform data

The icon color will indicate the status of the following types of image output.

Green Original image and/or states other than the below.

Light Blue Images that have been output to external media.
Orange Images sent to a server that have not received commitment.
Blue Images sent to a server that have received commitment.
Yellow Images imported to a device from an external media or server.

 B: Device icon
Use the icons to indicate storage destination.

Media connected via

Instrument Hard disk DVD CD-R Buffer
USB

 C: Image number (Series Number - Consecutive number)

 D: Image save format

: image during replay

: data that cannot be displayed

 E: Lock Icon
: Shows whether the image is locked or not.

160 | Review ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Displaying a selected image: Full Screen Display

Menu Icon

DICOM Images or Images Saved on the Instrument Hard Disk

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PC Format Images

2 3 9 6 10

1 Plays back the raw data. You can adjust various aspects of images such as the gain. Physiological signals and scale
bars can also be displayed.
2 Plays back the image right before the selected image.
3 Plays back the image right after the selected image.
4 Displays the previous frame (while paused).
5 Reduces the playback speed.
6 Playing (press this icon to stop).
7 Increases the playback speed.
8 Display the next frame (while paused).
9 Rewinds the image.
10 Fast-forwards the image.

Plays back the video

 Move the pointer to play/stop video (6 in the diagram) and press the [Enter] key.
 will be displayed on the thumbnail of the image being played.

 Select the icon to change the video play speed.

 Raises the play speed in the icon (7 in the

diagram).

 Lowers the play speed in the icon (5 in the

diagram).

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Review | 161
Displaying a selected image: Full Screen Display

5-2-2 Chooses and displays an image from tile display

Selects an image from the patient images displayed in the list and displays it on a single screen

1 Press the [Review] key. Alternatively, select [Tile View].

 The screen will change to tile display.

2 Move the pointer to the target image and press the [Enter] key twice.
Displaying the Touch Panel Menu
Assign [Full Screen View] to a direct switch, custom switch or the function menu.

a Press the [Pointer] key.

b Move the pointer to the target image.

c Press the [Enter] key.

d Select [Full Screen View].

 The selected image will be displayed.

Tile Display Screen

This will display images from the patient ID being examined in a list in the tile display screen.

C
A

Tile Display Example (Layout is 6x6)

A: Menu (Configurable by User)
B: Thumbnail Display Menu
C: Patient Data with Pointer Image
D: Thumbnail Display

162 | Review ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Displaying a selected image: Full Screen Display

Changing the Thumbnail Display in Tile Display

 Select from the File Form column to select different image types.
Options for Image Display

“All Images” Display all images.

“Single Images” Display only still images.
“Multi Images” Display only moving images.
“Raw Images” Display only images saved in RGB+Raw format.
“Stress Images” Display only stress echo images.

 Switching the thumbnail page.

 Select the ▲▼ to the right of Page on the

thumbnail display menu.

 Turn the [Pointer] key

 Select the Study column from the thumbnail display menu to search for images from past
examinations.
You can select from images from the current exam as well as from a “Custom” exam ID (all images will
be from the same patient ID).

 The layout can be changed through the Layout column of the thumbnail display menu.

Reloading Images

If devices or media have been updated, then you will need to search again for the images.

 Select [Reload] from the thumbnail display menu.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Review | 163
Comparing with real-time images: Comparison Display

5-3 Comparing with real-time images: Comparison

Display

Displays selected images and real-time images from an examination side-by-side.

Preliminary check If required, assign [Full Screen View] and [Current View] to a direct switch, custom switch or the function
menu.

The tomographic image single screen data can be displayed in comparison to the selected images and
real-time images.
But it's limited to images that have the same patient ID as the real-time images.

1 Press the [Pointer] key.

2 Move the pointer to the target image.

3 Switch to comparison display.

Switching with the Pop-Up Menu

a Press the [UNDO] key.

b Select [Compare This Image].

Switching using the Touch Panel Menu

Assign [Image Compare] to a direct switch, custom switch or the function menu.

a Press the [Enter] key.

b Select [Image Compare].

Display Example Real-time images are displayed on the right side and selected images on the left.

Change [Loop Mode (Img Compare)] to “ECG Sync” and it will be synchronized to real-time R wave and
played back. Change [Loop Mode (Img Compare)] to “Free Run” to unlock synchronizing.

Switching the Select [Full Screen View] to display images on full screen.
Screen Select [Current View] to display real-time images on full screen.

164 | Review ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Searching for images: Find

5-4 Searching for images: Find

Specify a patient ID and device to search for an image.

Preliminary check Assign [Current View] to a direct switch, custom switch or the function menu.

1 Select [Find] off of direct switch.

Find Screen

2 3

5
6

2 Select the target device with Search Device.

3 Select an image format with Format Type.

4 Configure patient information as the search key.

Selecting from the History
You can select from the search history with ▼.

Searching for images by send status or image type

a Select [Detail].
 The following dialogue box is displayed.

NOTE: This is possible only when the search device

is the local hard disk.

b Insert a checkmark for the items to search.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Review | 165
Searching for images: Find

Item Description
Send Status Not Sending Searches for images that have not been sent to the server.
Copy Searches for images that have been output to external media.
Import Searches for images imported in the Import screen or using Copy (Local HDD).
Commitment Displays images that were successfully sent to the server and received a
Storage Commitment from the server.
File Type RVS Group Searches for images related to RVS.
3D Volume Searches for 3D volume data.
Stress Searches for Stress Echo images.
Multi Searches for multiframe images.
Single Searches for single frame images.
Raw Searches for Raw data images.

5 Select the [Search] button.

 Search results will be displayed on the patient ID list.

6 Select a patient.
 The images included in the subject information will be listed on the thumbnails.

7 To return to the analysis screen, select [Current View] on the touch panel or in the custom
switches.

166 | Review ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Searching for images: Find

5-4-1 Searching for CT and MR Images

CT and MR data within a server or other external media can be searched.

1 Select the direct switch for [Find].

2 Select [Import] button.

3 Select a folder to search.

Selecting a Folder from Within a Media

a Turn Media On.

b Select a folder from tree view.

Selecting a Server

a Turn Server On.

b Select a target AE title from the server list.

Specifying Search Folders for Image Import

4 Input a category to search.

Search Key
You can select the patient ID, patient name, date of exam, and reception number in addition to modality
(“US”, “CT”, “MR”).

4
5

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Review | 167
Searching for images: Find

5 Select the [Search] button.

 The search results will be displayed in a list.

6 Select the target patient inspection ID from the Study list.

 The image in the selected patient exam ID will be displayed on the Image list.

Previewing Images
Select an image from the Image list and select the [Preview] button. Select the [Close] button to
close the preview screen.

Importing CT and MR images to the instrument hard disk

1 Search for a CT or MR image.

2 Select the target image.

a Select Study.

b Select Series.

c Select an image.

Selecting all Series Images

Select [Select All].

3 Select [Import].
 The selected images will then be imported to the instrument hard disk.

Save can be canceled by selecting [Cancel]. However, only the copies of an image after [Cancel] has
been selected will be canceled since the database is renewed per file unit.

168 | Review ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Configuring Data Encryption

5-5 Configuring Data Encryption

Individual information of data outputted from the instrument can be encrypted.

Individual information will be included in the data and images outputted from the instrument.
Individual information is also included in the information embedded in the file, for instance the patient
ID and patient name will be displayed on screen. This private information and output data and images
can be encrypted.

1 Select [Archive Setup] on the tile display and/or search screen.

2 Set each property.

TIP: Turn Teaching File On and you can confirm masking while saving an image.

Configuring DICOM Related Tags

Select [DICOM Attribute] and set the properties.

3 Select [Exit].

Reference For information on how to open the tile view or search screen, refer to the following.
Information Chooses and displays an image from tile display → p.162

Searching for images: Find → p.165

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Review | 169
Configuring Data Encryption

5-5-1 Setting item

Archive Setup Item
Item Contents
Single Frame Selects the still image storage format.
Multi Frame Selects the moving image storage format.
Teaching File Masks patient data in copies and images sent to a medium or server.
Additional Mask Item Adds to the aforementioned and configured masked items.
Mask Position Manual Setting Sets the target image size. Selects 1024 x 768 pixels for images saved on the
instrument.

DICOM Attribute (Mask Item of DICOM Attribute) set item

Item Contents
Mask Information Selects masked information.
NOTE: To mask other data, turn On Personal.
Dummy Patient ID Enter the Prefix up to 20 characters and select No Code. The patient ID will be
replaced with the Prefix.
For a random code, enter the Prefix up to 20 characters and turn Random Code On.
Random (8 digits) is added to Prefix and subject ID is replaced.

170 | Review ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Editing Moving Images

5-6 Editing Moving Images

This function allows you to select part of a moving image and resave it to reduce the amount of data
sent to the server.
NOTE: Data can only be saved to the instrument hard disk.

Preliminary check Assign [Trimming] to the function menu.

If required, assign [Full Screen View] to a direct switch, custom switch or the function menu.

1 [Review] key or select the [Tile View].

 The screen will change to tile display.

2 Select the desired image.

a Press the [Pointer] key.

b Move the pointer to the target image and

press the [Enter] key twice.
 The selected image is played in the Full
Screen View.

3 Stops playback.
a Set the [Cine Search] key to On.

b Roll the trackball left or right.

4 Select the loop sector and save.

a Use the trackball to display the start frame
and press the [Enter] key.

b Display the end frame and press the [Enter]

key.

5 Select [Trimming].
 The selected section is saved in a separate file.

Plays back the selected section in full screen view when it is saved.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Review | 171
Copying Images

5-7 Copying Images

Selected images can be saved to a designated device without changing the save format.

Data Encryption Configure encryption under [Teaching File] and [Mask Item (Video)].

1 Select object image in tile display and/or on search screen.

Selecting All Images
Select [Select All] from the menu area to select all patient images.

Select [Deselect All] to unselect all patient images.

Select [Deselect All Patients] to unselect everything including other patient images.

TIP: Images can be selected even if the patient ID and devices are different.

2 Select [>>### (Copy)] (### is the output source) from the menu area.
Output sources include Local HD (instrument hard disk), USB, CD-R Buffer, and DVD.

When there is No Menu

a Move the pointer to on the menu and

press the [Enter] key.

b Select [Copy] and [(storage source)] in that

order.

c Select that menu.

 The message: “Are you sure you want to copy
this image?” will be displayed.
When the Archive message is displayed
Refer to "When the Archive message is displayed".

3 Check the number of images in the message.

4 Select [OK].

Reference For information on how to open the tile view or search screen, refer to the following.
Information Chooses and displays an image from tile display → p.162

Searching for images: Find → p.165

172 | Review ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Copying Images

5-7-1 When the Archive message is displayed

If data encryption has not been configured

1 Remove the check under Teaching File on the Archive message.

2 Select [Exit].

If data encryption has been configured

1 Place a check under Teaching File on the Archive message.

2 Check the message.

Message Status
“This mask position of all files is detected.” When the output size of all selected files has been detected.
“The mask position of some files cannot be detected. When there are files where output size could not be
Set the mask position manually.” detected.
“WMV, ASF and/or MP4 files are not masked.” When ASF files are included among the selected files. The
WMV, ASF and/or MP4 files cannot be masked.

3 Check the image and revise the masked position if necessary.

a Select the [1 by 1 Setting/Preview] button.

b Select [Prev] and/or [Next] to display the

target image.

c Select the resolution in Mask Position

Manual Setting.
For Data Such as Reports Which are not Masked

Turn [No mask] into .

d Repeat steps b - c.

e Select [Exit].

4 Select [Exit].

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Review | 173
Deleting Images

5-8 Deleting Images

1 Select object image in tile display and/or on search screen.

Selecting All Images
Select [Select All] from the menu area to select all patient images.

Select [Deselect All] to unselect all patient images.

Select [Deselect All Patients] to unselect everything including other patient images.

TIP: Images can be selected even if the patient ID and devices are different.

2 Select [Delete] from the menu area.

Select [Delete] to delete selected images.

Select [Delete CD-R Buffer] from the touch panel to delete all data within the CD-R Buffer.

Select [Delete All] from the touch panel to delete all patient ID images found on the search screen.

 The message: “Are you sure you want to delete this image?” will be displayed.

3 Check the number of images in the message.

4 Select [OK].

Reference For information on how to open the tile view or search screen, refer to the following.
Information Chooses and displays an image from tile display → p.162

Searching for images: Find → p.165

174 | Review ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Saving Images in PC Format

5-9 Saving Images in PC Format

Images within the instrument hard disk can be outputted to other devices in PC format.

Images with the , , , icons can be outputted. Other images will not be outputted.

1 Select the patient images within the instrument hard disk using the tile display and/or search
menu.
Selecting All Images
Select [Select All] from the menu area to select all patient images.

Select [Deselect All] to unselect all patient images.

Select [Deselect All Patients] to unselect everything including other patient images.

TIP: Images can be selected even if the patient IDs are different.

2 Select the [>>Output Location (PC Format)] from the menu area.
Locations to output include USB, CD-RBuffer, DVD and Network Folder.

When They're Not Displayed in the Menu

a Move the pointer to on the menu button

and press the [Enter] key.

b Select [Save as], then [(Storage Destination)]

in that order.

c Select that menu.

 The message: “Are you sure you want to save
this image?” will be displayed.
When the Archive message is displayed
Refer to "When the Archive message is displayed" in this guide.

3 Select [OK].

Reference For information on how to open the tile view or search screen, refer to the following.
Information Chooses and displays an image from tile display → p.162

Searching for images: Find → p.165

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Review | 175
Transferring Images

5-10 Transferring Images

Selected image can be transferred to a designated server.

Preliminary check Set the destination server in the Server/Worklist tab in the preset ([Preset Setup > SystemPreset >
DICOM]).

This function is aimed at DICOM images. However, DICOM-CT( ), DICOM-MR ( ), and RVS state
files ( ) cannot be transferred.

1 Select object image in tile display and/or on search screen.

Selecting All Images
Select [Select All] from the menu area to select all patient images.

Select [Deselect All] to unselect all patient images.

Select [Deselect All Patients] to unselect everything including other patient images.

TIP: Images can be selected even if the patient ID and devices are different.

2 Select [>>Network (Preset)] from the menu area.

Changing the Save to destination

a Move the pointer to the ▼ menu button and

press the [Enter] key.

b Place the pointer on [Network].

c Select one of [Remote1] to [Remote5].

 If a single image is selected, the message “Are you sure you want to send this image?” appears.

If multiple images are selected, the message “Are you sure you want to send the *** stored images?
”appears.

3 Select [OK].
 When the transfer is complete, the message “Send succeeded.” will be displayed.

Reference For information on how to open the tile view or search screen, refer to the following.
Information Chooses and displays an image from tile display → p.162

Searching for images: Find → p.165

176 | Review ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Transferring Images

5-10-1 Transferring Images in Video Clip Format

Images that are saved to the Local HD (instrument hard disk) can be saved in the Video Clip format.
Set Convert to Video Clip in the Common tab in the preset ([Preset Setup > Filling]) to On.
This works with the following kinds of images.

 Video (RGB+Raw format) ( )

 Stress Echo Image ( )

 File with Position Information ( )

Prior confirmation Set the Teaching File to Off.

NOTE: Images cannot be transferred when the Teaching File is set to On.

1 Open the Tile screen.

2 Select the target image.

3 Select the menu area [>> Network (###)] (### indicates the destination server).
 The message “Are you sure you want to copy this image?” is displayed.

4 Select [OK].
If an Archive message is displayed
Refer to "Copying images" in this volume.

If the message “Some of the selected data cannot be transferred. Do you want to continue?” is displayed
The images cannot be transferred because the Teaching File is set to On. Select [OK] to continue. Select
[Cancel] to cancel.

If the message “There is no file to send” is displayed

The images cannot be transferred because the Teaching File is set to On. Set the Teaching File to Off and
perform the procedure again.

If the message “Failed to convert to Video Clip. Please try again. ”is displayed
The images could not be converted to a Video Clip. Please try again.

If the message “Not enough hard disk space. Free up disk space.” is displayed
Not enough space on hard disk. Delete any unnecessary data from the Local HD.

 Conversion to Video Clip moving image starts. The system plays the moving image full screen
during conversion. Once the conversion is complete, the Video Clip moving image is saved to Local
HD and selected output destinations.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Review | 177
Printing Images

5-11 Printing Images

A selected still image can be printed.

1 Select object image in tile display and/or on search screen.

Selecting All Images
Select [Select All] from the menu area to select all patient images.

Select [Deselect All] to unselect all patient images.

Select [Deselect All Patients] to unselect everything including other patient images.

TIP: Images can be selected even if the patient ID and devices are different.

2 Select [>>DICOM Printer] or [>>Local Printer] from the menu area.

Select [>>Local Printer] for PC formatted images.

Only images with “DICOM” on their thumbnail icons will can be printed on DICOM printers.

When the Menu is Not Displayed

a Move the pointer to on the menu button

and press the [Enter] key.

b Select [Print], [Local] and [DICOM] in that

order.

c Select that menu.

 The message: “Are you sure you want to print this image?” will be displayed.

3 Select [OK].
 The images will be combined by patient and printed.

Reference For information on how to open the tile view or search screen, refer to the following.
Information Chooses and displays an image from tile display → p.162

Searching for images: Find → p.165

178 | Review ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Printing Images

5-11-1 Configuring Printer Properties

Local and DICOM printer properties can be configured.

1 Display the tile display and/or search menu.

2 Select [Print Property] from the menu area.

When there is No Menu

a Move the pointer to the menu button

and press the [Enter] key.

b Select [Print Property].

3 Configured the properties.

4 Select [OK].

Reference For information on how to open the tile view or search screen, refer to the following.
Information Chooses and displays an image from tile display → p.162

Searching for images: Find → p.165

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Review | 179
Printing Images

Printer Properties Settings Categories

Local Printer Settings

Item Description
Printer Name Selects the Local printer to print images on.
Num of Copies Sets the number of copies to print.
Paper Size Sets the paper size to print on.
N-up Sets the number of images to print on each page.
Orientation Sets the paper orientation.
Trim Sets the margins between images when printing multiple images on a single page.

DICOM Printer
Item Description
Model Name Selects the DICOM printer to print images on.
Appl. Entity Displays the name of the DICOM standard program.
Num of Copies Sets the number of copies to print.
Medium type Selects the print media.
Film size Sets the paper size.
Orientation Sets the printer orientation.
Display format Sets the display format when multiple images are printed on a single page.
Magnification Sets the type of enlargement process to use.
Smoothing The type of data smoothing is set.
Trim Sets whether to place margins between images when printing multiple images on a
single page.
Print priority Sets the priority by which print jobs are processed.
Destination Sets the printer.
Min density Enter the minimum brightness value for printing.
Max density Enter the maximum brightness value for printing.
Border density Sets the brightness of borders between images.
Empty density Sets the brightness of areas with no image to print.
Image polarity Sets the polarity of the printed image.
Configuration info Space to enter comments.

180 | Review ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Writing onto a CD-R

5-12 Writing onto a CD-R

CD-R buffer data can be written onto a CD-R.

1 Select [Burning CD] from the tile display and/or search screen menu area.

2 Enter the CD Name in up to 16 characters.

3 Select Buffer Erase.

 On: Confirm the CD-R buffer has cleared the

burn has finished.

 Off: Clear the CD-R buffer without displaying

a message after the burn has finished.

4 Select [Start].
 The data will be written to the CD-R. The current status will be displayed in a progress bar.

Reference For information on how to open the tile view or search screen, refer to the following.
Information Chooses and displays an image from tile display → p.162

Searching for images: Find → p.165

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Review | 181
Confirming Free Space

5-13 Confirming Free Space

Confirm free space of hard disk device and connecting media.

1 Select [Disk Remain] from the tile display and/or search screen menu area.
 This will display the free space/total space in a dialog.

Reload the displayed contents by selecting [Reload].

2 Select [OK].
 The dialog box will close.

Reference For information on how to open the tile view or search screen, refer to the following.
Information Chooses and displays an image from tile display → p.162

Searching for images: Find → p.165

182 | Review ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Activate the Analysis

5-14 Activate the Analysis

Use selected image and/or data file for analysis.

5-14-1 Starting analysis from the Find/Time View screen

1 Select an image from the tile display and/or search screen.

2 Select the target for analysis on the touch panel.

Analysis Menu

TDI Analysis Starts TDI analysis.

CHI Analysis Starts CE Analysis.
3D Reconstruction Reconstruct the 3D image.
eTRACKING Starts eTRACKING related analysis.
Stress Echo Load Loads stress echo data.
2D Tissue Tracking Starts 2D Tissue Tracking analysis.
RVS Starts Real-time Virtual Sonography.

Reference For information on how to open the tile view or search screen, refer to the following.
Information Chooses and displays an image from tile display → p.162

Searching for images: Find → p.165

5-14-2 Starting analysis from the thumbnail area

Preliminary check Assign the target for analysis to a direct switch or custom switch.

1 Select an image from the thumbnail area.

2 Select the target for analysis on the touch panel.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Review | 183
Activate the Analysis

184 | Review ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 6 Exiting an
Examination

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Exiting an Examination | 185
Finish examination/begin next examination

6-1 Finish examination/begin next examination

Ends the current examination and moves on to the next one.

6-1-1 List of network connection operations

The state of network connection determines what happens when the [New Patient] and the [End Exam]
keys are pressed.

The [New Patient] key is pressed The [End Exam.] key is pressed
When not connected to an A new ID screen appears. The ID screen for the same patient appears.
MPPS server
When Connected to an A new ID screen appears. The MPPS dialogue box is displayed.
MPPS server
When connected to a When the preset ([Preset Setup > SystemPreset > DICOM > Server/Worklist]) [All Images
DICOM server of Study] is On, all images are sent.
When connected to a When the preset ( [Preset Setup > SystemPreset > SR] ) [SR Auto Creation] is On, an SR file
DICOM SR server is created and sent.
When not connected to the A new ID screen appears. The ID screen for the same patient appears.
network

6-1-2 If there is no network connection, or if there is only a connection

to a Worklist server

If you will change to another patient after ending the examination

1 Press the [New Patient] key.

 Complete the ongoing examination and bring up the ID screen (for new input).

2 Enter patient data for the next patient.

3 Select [OK] or press the [New Patient] key.

186 | Exiting an Examination ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Finish examination/begin next examination

If you will perform another examination on the same patient after ending the
current examination

This method allows you to examine another region on the same patient or examine several patients.

1 Press the [End Exam.] key.

 The ID screen with the patient information is displayed.

2 Change the preset and the probe.

3 Select [OK] or press the [New Patient] key.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Exiting an Examination | 187
Finish examination/begin next examination

6-1-3 If there is a connection to an MPPS server

The MPPS server is notified of the end or interruption of the examination.

Exiting an Examination

The MPPS server is notified of the end of the examination, and the next examination starts.

1 Press the [New Patient] key or [End Exam.] key.

 [New Patient] key

Choose this method if you will change to

another patient after ending the
examination.

 [End Exam.] key

Choose this method if you will perform the

next examination on the same patient after
ending the current examination.

 Switches to the ID screen if the image is not saved. The End Exam steps are now complete.

The MPPS dialog box appears if an image is being saved.

2 Select “Completed” from the list for steps that have been completed.

3 Select [OK] or press the [New Patient] key.

 The MPPS server is notified at the end of the examination and an ID screen showing previous patient
information appears.

If there are DICOM SR files, sends those files that were created up to the end of the examination.

NOTE: In some cases, network authentication may be required when sending data.

188 | Exiting an Examination ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Finish examination/begin next examination

Interrupting an examination:

Notifies MPPS of the interruption of the examination. The interrupted examination can be resumed
later.

1 Press the [New Patient] key or [End Exam.] key.

 [New Patient] key

Choose this method if you will change to

another patient after ending the
examination.

 [End Exam.] key

Choose this method if you will perform the

next examination on the same patient after
ending the current examination.

 Switches to the ID screen if the image is not saved. Because the MPPS is not notified of anything, the
examination can be repeated later.

A dialog box appears if an image is being saved.

2 Select “DISCONTINUED” from the list for steps that have been completed.

3 Select the reason for discontinuation of the examination.

4 Select [OK].
 Notifies the MPPS server of the examination discontinuation. The screen switches to the ID screen.

If there are DICOM SR files, sends those files that were created up to the end of the examination.

Starting the Enter the information for each item on the ID screen. Alternatively, select an examination from the
examination worklist.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Exiting an Examination | 189
Finish examination/begin next examination

Reasons for discontinuation of the examination

“Doctor cancelled procedure:” The doctor discontinued the examination.

“Equipment failure:” The instrument failed.
“Incorrect procedure ordered:” The wrong examination was scheduled.
“Patient allergic to media/contrast:” The patient was allergic to the contrast medium.
“Patient died:” The patient died.
“Patient refused to continue procedure:” The patient refused to continue the examination.
“Patient taken for treatment or surgery:” The patient left for treatment or surgery.
“Patient did not arrive:” The patient did not come for the examination.
“Patient pregnant:” The patient was pregnant.
“Change of procedure for correct charging:” The examination was changed to reflect treatment billing.
“Duplicate order:” There was a duplication of orders.
“Nursing unit cancel:” The nursing unit canceled the examination.
“Incorrect side ordered:” The additional order is not clearly defined.
“Discontinued for unspecified reason:” Without reason.
“Incorrect worklist entry selected:” The entry in the worklist was incorrect.
“Patient condition prevented continuing:” The patient's condition worsened.
“Equipment Change:” The instrument was changed.

190 | Exiting an Examination ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 7 Patient information
management

NOTE: If user authentication is turned on, the operations described in

this chapter are limited to users with Level 1 access permissions.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Patient information management | 191
Loading patient information from USB media

7-1 Loading patient information from USB media

Load patient information from USB media to the instrument hard disk.

1 Select [Data Management] on the ID screen.

2 Select the Target Medium USB.

3 Select a file from the file list.

a Move the pointer to the file to select, and
press the [Enter] key.

b Select [OK].

4 Select the patient information to load.

a Set the search conditions (Patient ID, Patient
Name, From, Until).

b Select [Search].

c Select the patient information to revise.

To select all patient information

Select [ALL].

5 Select [Read from Media].

 Load the patient information that was selected on the instrument hard disk.

If the following message is displayed, you can choose to overwrite or not to overwirte.

 [Yes]: Load the information from USB media to the corresponding information on the hard disk.

 [All Yes]: Delete the corresponding information on the hard disk, and load the information from the
USB media. The same applies to the same information later.

 [No]: The corresponding information on the hard disk is not overwritten.

 [Cancel]: Cancel overwriting.

192 | Patient information management ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Writing patient information from the instrument hard disk

7-2 Writing patient information from the instrument

hard disk

Write patient information from the instrument hard disk to USB media.

1 Select [Data Management] on the ID screen.

2 Select the Target Medium Local HDD.

3 Select the patient information to write.

a Set the search conditions (Patient ID, Patient
Name, Period).

b Select [Search].

c Select the patient information.

To select all patient information

Select [ALL].

4 Select [Write to Media].

5 Enter the file name. Alternatively, select a file from the file list.

6 Select [OK].
 The selected patient information is written to USB.

If all data is selected, “You are about to write all study data.” “Deletion once started cannot be
interrupted. Do you still want to delete the data?” will be displayed. Select [OK] to start writing.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Patient information management | 193
Deleting patient information

7-3 Deleting patient information

1 Select [Data Management] on the ID screen.

2 Select the Target Medium.

If the Target Medium is USB

a Move the pointer to the file to select, and

press the [Enter] key.

b Select [OK].

3 Select the patient information to delete.

a Set the search conditions (Patient ID, Patient
Name, From, Until).

b Select [Search].

c Select the patient information.

To select all patient information

Select [ALL].

4 Select [Delete].
 The selected patient information will be deleted.

If all data are selected, “You are about to write all study data.” “Deletion once started cannot be
interrupted. Do you still want to delete the data?” will be displayed. Select [OK] to start writing.

194 | Patient information management ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 To Revise Patient Information

7-4 To Revise Patient Information

Modify selected patient information.

NOTE: Patient information can only be modified by a user logged in with user authentication level 1.

1 Select [Data Management] on the ID screen.

2 Select the Target Medium Local HDD.

3 Select the patient information to revise.

a Set the search conditions (Patient ID, Patient
Name, From, Until).

b Select [Search].

c Select the patient information to revise.

4 Select [Edit].

5 Modify patient information (patient ID, patient name, sex, birth date).
NOTE: The patient name is displayed in three divisions (surname, given name, middle name).

6 Select [OK].
 Update the patient database and the patient information for the saved image.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Patient information management | 195
To Revise Patient Information

196 | Patient information management ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 8 Menus

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Menus | 197
Types of menu

8-1 Types of menu

NOTE: Refer to "Basic Operations" in this guide for menu selection methods.

(1)

(2)

(3)

Figure 1: Touch panel display example

(1) Direct switches, (2) Tabs, (3) Function menus

Menus are broadly divided into direct switches ((1) in the illustration above), and Function menus ((2) in
the illustration above).
When direct switches are selected, they start the corresponding function.
Function menus (above figure (3) group modes and functions into tabs for display.
Sets the assignment of functions to direct switch and the function menu with input device presets.

Reference Touch panel menu → p.20

Information Assigning functions → p.333

198 | Menus ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Direct switches

8-2 Direct switches

This section explains functions that can be assigned to direct switch items.
You can assign the functions mentioned in this menu to the custom switch, foot switch and/or custom
keyboard (F1 key - F12 key)
The optional alphanumeric keyboard (EP-9165) is required to assign functions to a custom keyboard.
B
Menu name Description
Auto-optimizer Starts the auto optimization process.
Auto-optimizer Reset Resets the auto optimization process.
Top Display In 360° radial display, the upper 180° portion is displayed.
Bottom Display In 360° radial display, the lower 180° portion is displayed.
Left Display In 360° radial display, the left-hand 180° portion is displayed.
Right Display In 360° radial display, the right-hand 180° portion is displayed.
Brightness Level Switches the brightness target value between Auto and Manual.
Reset Brightness Resets the automatically-acquired average brightness value.
Compound Starts or ends Spatial Compound.
Compound # Changes the number of spatial compound addition image layers. # represents 1 or 2.
B Format Size (H) Switch B mode image and M mode image height and width of B, 2B, B/M, and B/D.
Panoramic View Starts or ends Panoramic View.
HI REZ Starts or ends HI REZ.
Texture Switches Texture between “Smooth” and “Sharp”.
Invert L/R L/R inverts the B mode image.
Invert U/L U/L inverts the B mode image.
Assist Line Displays or hides the lines corresponding to the headcase scale of the L64 probe.
Real-time Biplane Starts or ends real time biplane.
Plane Switches the plane, when there is a Connector 1 or Connector 2 biplane probe but
real time biplane is not running.
Plane + A biplane probe that enables simultaneous switching between a cross-sectional
plane and the current screen.
TGC Switches the TGC knob between Depth Fixed and Window Fixed.
Trapezoidal Scanning Starts or ends trapezoidal scanning.
Vertical Shift Shifts the B mode image vertically, relative to the screen display range on the
monitor.
Use the trackball to shift vertically.
Puncture Guide Line Displays or hides the puncture guideline.
Puncture Depth Display Displays or clears a mark that displays the distance from the puncture point at any
chosen position along the puncture guideline.
Scan Area Sets the B mode image visual field.
Use the trackball to change the scan area.
Switches the scaling and movement of the B mode image visual field with the [Enter]
key.
THI Displays a B mode image by the Harmonics method. Either “FmT”, “WbT”, or “HdT” is
displayed as the frequency information.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Menus | 199
Direct switches

Menu name Description

Coded Displays a B mode image by the Coded transmission method. Either “FmT”, “WbT”, or
“HdT” is displayed as the frequency information.
Quad Switches to tomographic image Quad.
Switches the active image in Quad.
Needle Emphasis Improves the visibility of the puncture needle echo.
Puncture Link (NE) When [Needle Emphasis] is On, the Graphic Line 1 is displayed as perpendicular to
the puncture guide line as possible.
Dual Switches the tomographic image to dual screen display.
Switches an active image to dual screen mode.

D
Menu name Description
Auto Angle Correction Automatically sets the correction angle, based on color information.
Invert Spectrum Inverts the Doppler image centered on the baseline.
Freeze Trigger On displays the trace line and measurement result when the image is frozen.
Off hides the trace line and measurement result when the image is frozen.
Trace Smooth Switches the smoothness level of the trace line.
Trace Locate Moves the display position of the Doppler Auto Trace measurement result, or ends
that movement.
Trans. Menu Auto Display Displays the transfer menu when the Doppler Auto Trace measurement result is
displayed.
Dop Cursor Displays the Dop cursor on the tomographic image.
Simultaneous (PW) On uses dual screen display of the tomographic image and sweep image (PW or
TD-PW), with both screens active.
Off uses dual screen display of the tomographic image and sweep image (PW or
TD-PW), with only the tomographic image screen active.
In sweep image single screen (PW or TD-PW), this switches to dual screen display of
the tomographic image and the sweep image (PW or TD-PW), in addition to the
above On/Off.
Full M/D On displays the sweep image (M, PW, CW, TD-PW) on single screen.
Off displays it with the tomographic image on dual screen.
Dual Gate Doppler Displays two Dop cursors.
CW Switches to dual screen display of tomographic image and CW mode.
Doppler Auto Trace Starts or ends Doppler Auto Trace.
TD-PW Starts TD-PW mode.

Color
Menu name Description
Accumu. Imaging Displays and hides the accumulation of color pixels.
Invert Color Map Inverts color polarity.
Dual CF When ON, displays the B mode image on the left or top screen and the Color Flow
mode image on the right or bottom screen in simultaneous dual screen mode.
Off displays the tomographic image on single screen.
Directional Displays or hides the blood flow direction in PD mode or eFlow mode.
TDI Starts TDI mode.
eFlow Starts eFlow mode.
PD Starts PD mode.

200 | Menus ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Direct switches

Other
Menu name Description
Archive Group 1 Outputs to the destination assigned to this menu.
Archive Group 2 Outputs to the destination assigned to this menu.
Archive Group 3 Outputs to the destination assigned to this menu.
Archive Group 4 Outputs to the destination assigned to this menu.
Archive Group 5 Outputs to the destination assigned to this menu.
B/D Format Switches between left/right display and upper/lower display for B/D mode.
B/M Format Switches between left/right display and upper/lower display for B/M mode.
Body Mark Displays or hides body marks.
Caliper Starts the basic measurement assigned to this key.
Cine Search Changes the trackball functions to Search/Scroll.
Comment Displays the pointer in the analysis screen, or ends comment entry.
Counter (A) Starts the count up and displays the counter on the top left of the screen.
Counter (B) Starts the count up and displays the counter on the top left of the screen.
Current View Switches to the analysis screen.
Delete All Deletes all images.
Disk Remain On displays the remaining capacity of the media.
Off hides the remaining capacity of the media.
End Exam Ends the current examination and moves to the next examination of the same
patient.
EXT Displays images from external connected media.
Find Displays the search screen.
Freeze Turns freeze on and off.
Full Screen View Displays the selected image on full screen.
ID Displays patient data currently under examination on the patient data screen.
Image Compare Displays the selected image on the left and the examination image on the right, in
dual screen.
Invert Link Links [Invert Color Map] to [Invert Spectrum].
KB Displays or hides the virtual keyboard on the touch panel.
Load Raw Data Loads Raw data into cine and plays it.
Logoff Logs off from instrument user authentication.
M1: ***** Starts the menu item that was assigned by the measurement preset.
M2: ***** Starts the menu item that was assigned by the measurement preset.
M3: ***** Starts the menu item that was assigned by the measurement preset.
M4: ***** Starts the menu item that was assigned by the measurement preset.
Manual Displays the instruction manual selection menu screen.
Measurement Displays the measurement menus.
Next Image Switches to the next selected image in full screen view or comparison display.
Original Displays the Raw playback image in its state before image adjustment.
Parameter Display Displays or hides analysis screen parameters.
Playback Start/End Plays back captured images from cine memory, or stops that playback.
Power Limit Override Overrides the acoustic power limit for fetal applications, or applies the limit.
Prev Image Switches to the previous selected image in full screen view or comparison display.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Menus | 201
Direct switches

Menu name Description

Print Queue Prints print files in the print queue folder.
QSS A Applies QSS A presets.
QSS B Applies QSS B presets.
QSS C Applies QSS C presets.
QSS D Applies QSS D presets.
Send Sends the active applied measurement results to a report.
REC Records on a HD Video Recorder.
R-Wave Beep Plays the beep sound when the R-wave is detected, or turns it off.
Store Saves the display image.
T.B.F. Switches trackball functions.
Teaching File (Video) Patient data are masked if moving image is saved in video clip format anywhere other
than the instrument hard disk, or if video is recorded.
Thumbnail Page Switches between pages in the thumbnail area.
Tile View Displays a list of images with the same ID as the current patient ID.
Update Switches the active screen in dual screen display of the tomographic image and
sweep image.
Video Clip Auto Stop On freezes the display after a video clip is saved.
Off returns to real time after a video clip is saved.

Physio
Menu name Description
ECG Display Displays or hides the ECG display.
ECG Filter Removes body movement from the ECG.
HR Stability Display Starts or ends HR Stability Display.
Invert ECG Display Inverts ECG display vertically.
PCG Display Displays or hides the PGC display.
Pulse Display Displays or hides the pulse waves.
Resp. Display Displays or hides the respiration curve.
R-R Detection Starts or ends R-R detection.
R-R Start Frame Displays a frame for the detected sector immediately before the time phase bar.
R-R End Frame Displays a frame for the detected sector immediately after the time phase bar.

DSD
Menu name Description
DSD (ECG) Starts or ends DSD (ECG) mode.
DSD (Time) Starts or ends DSD (Time) mode.
DSD Refresh Refreshes the slow motion display.

FAM
Menu name Description
Active FAM disp. off Hides the active FAM cursor.
FAM Starts or ends FAM mode.
FAM Cursor Number Switches the FAM cursor number between 2 and 3.

202 | Menus ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Direct switches

Menu name Description

PSAX On displays multiple FAM cursors fixed at the centers.
Off displays one FAM cursor.
Center Independence On releases the links between FAM cursors.
Off links FAM cursors at their center points.
Trace Fit On fits the length of FAM cursors to the display range of the B mode image.
Off displays with a scale fitted to [MAG (FAM)].

PinP
Menu name Description
Full Displays the PinP Window in full size.
Half Displays the PinP Window in half size.
Displays a small-sized PinP Window in the lower left.
Lower Left
Displays a small-sized PinP Window in the lower right.
Lower Right
PinP Window Displays or hides the PinP Window.
Small Displays the PinP Window in small size.
Displays a small-sized PinP Window in the upper left.
Upper Left
Displays a small-sized PinP Window in the upper right.
Upper Right

Functions not assigned to the function menu in modes other than those listed above.
Refer to each different user manual for functions that can also be assigned to the function menu.
Menu name Description
TDI Analysis Starts TDI analysis.
CHI Analysis Starts CHI analysis.
4D Mode Starts 4D mode.
3D/4D Selection Resets to the state before 3D import.
STIC Mode Switches to the state before importing in STIC mode.
HI DEF 3D Mode Switches to the state before importing in HI DEF 3D mode.
Select (3D) Changes the active image in 3D Display.
eTRACKING Starts eTRACKING.
FMD Starts FMD.
WI Starts Wave Intensity.
Stress Echo Starts Stress Echo mode.
Stress Echo Load Loads stress echo data.
Elastography Starts Real-time Tissue Elastography.
2DTT Analysis Starts 2D Tissue Tracking analysis.
RVS Starts Real-time Virtual Sonography.
Shear Wave Meas. Starts Shear Wave Measurement.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Menus | 203
Function menu

8-3 Function menu

This section explains each function menu item described in the Basic Operation Section as well as other
related information. According to their display modes or functions, items are subdivided into 8 types; B,
M, D, Color, Physio, DSD, FAM, and PinP; as well as Other. These classifications depend on the
classifications (modes) of Input Device in presets. Find/Tile is a function menu displayed in Find View
and Tile View. For other function menus, such as those for analysis, refer to the relevant sections of the
instruction manual.
The type assigned to the 1st to 3rd tiers of the function menu
Type Explanation Display Example

One-shot Starts the function when selected. DSD Refresh

Starts the function when selected. It switches to Off if another

Alternative Post (Time) Pre(Time)
function in the same group is selected.

Off On

On-Off Switches between On and Off when selected. HI REZ HI-REZ

PW/PW PW/TDI

Rotation Switches between two or more options when selected. Dual Dop. Dual Dop.
Combination Combination

HDD

Expand Displays expanded menus when selected. Color Map Store Media
(B/M)

The way the Multi type is displayed varies with the position of the function menu.

Display
Position Explanation Example

100.0
Select left/right to choose values or options. It is displayed
1st tier to 3rd tier Multi
Sweep Speed(M)
across the width of two menus, on left and right.

Turn the multi rotary encoder under the menu in the arrowed 100.0 100.0
4th tier
direction to select values or options. Sweep Speed Sweep Speed
(M) (M)

Turn the multi rotary encoder under the menu to select values 100.0
5th tier (lowest)
or options. Sweep Speed
(M)

204 | Menus ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Function menu

8-3-1 Function menu: B

This section explains function menus classified as B mode.

Menu Option Item

[Auto-optimizer] Starts Auto Optimization in B mode or D mode.
[Auto-optimizer Reset] Resets Auto Optimization. Restores the state immediately
before Auto Optimization.
[Brightness Level] “Auto” Automatically gets the brightness target value.
“Manual” Sets the brightness target value using [Brightness Level
(Manual)].
[Compound] “Off” Ends Compound.
“On” Starts Compound.
NOTE:Applicable probes are the linear electric probe and the
convex electric probe.
[Compound #] “1” Switches the number of Compound addition layers to Type 1.
“2” Switches the number of Compound addition layers to Type 2.
[B Format Size (H)] “Normal” Switches the height of B mode and M mode images to
“Normal”.
“Small” Switches the height of B mode and M mode images to “Small”.
[Panoramic View] “Off” Ends Panoramic View.
“On” Starts Panoramic View.
[HI REZ] “Off” Removes the HI REZ image filter.
“On” Applies an image filter that maintains the edges of structures
while reducing speckle noise.
[Echo Enh. (B)] “0” Removes the echo enhancement image filter.
“1” to “7” Creates an image from a weak signal by filling gaps in the scan
direction and applying a filter to lower the brightness in
low-bright areas and increasing it in high-bright areas.
[Texture] “Smooth” Displays smoother images.
“Sharp” Displays sharper images.
[Invert L/R] “Off” Cancels inversion of the display image.
“On” Inverts the display image horizontally.
[Assist Line] “Off” Hides the assist line.
“On” Displays the assist line.
[Real-time Biplane] “Off” Ends Real Time Biplane.
“On” Displays in Real Time Biplane.
[Plane] “T” Displays a transverse section for a biplane probe.
“L” Displays a longitudinal section for a biplane probe.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Menus | 205
Function menu

Menu Option Item

[Plane +] “T” Displays a transverse section for a biplane probe in single
screen display.
Displays a transverse section for a biplane probe in dual screen
display or quad view and simultaneously switching the active
screen.
“L” Displays a longitudinal section for a biplane probe in single
screen display.
Displays a longitudinal section for a biplane probe in dual
screen display or quad view and simultaneously switching the
active screen.
[TGC] “Fixed” Assigns a certain depth to each [TGC] knob.
The depth corresponding to each [TGC] knob does not
change, even if the display range does.
“Variable” Divides the depth of the whole screen into equal parts and
assigns one to each [TGC] knob.
The depth corresponding to each [TGC] knob changes with
the display range.
[Trapezoidal Scanning] “Off” Ends Trapezoidal Scanning.
“On” Starts Trapezoidal Scanning.
NOTE: The applicable probe is the linear electric probe.
[Vertical Shift] “Off” End Vertical Shift.
“On” Shifts the tomographic image up and down, relative to the
display range.
[AGC (B)] “0” Cancels auto gain correction.
“1” to “3” Applies auto gain correction. As the value increases, so does
the correction level.
AGC (Auto Gain Control) analyzes brightness in the depth
direction, suppressing spikes in echo level.
[Brightness Level (Manual)] “40” to “80” If the [Brightness Level] is set to “Manual”, this changes the
brightness target value.
[Beam Steer (B)] “-30” to “30” Changes the steering angle of the ultrasound beam in an
electronic linear probe, in 5° units.
NOTE:The steering angle range varies depending on the
probe.
[Beam Steer [Skip] (B)] Switches between the angle set in [Beam Steer (B)], the reverse
angle and 0 degrees.
[Invert Steer (B)] Switches between the angle set in [Beam Steer (B)] and the
reverse angle.
[Steer (Compound)] “Negative” Changes the Compound transmission direction to left only.
Displays orientation with an arrow on the orientation mark.
“Off” Changes the Compound transmission direction to all
direction.
“Positive” Changes the Compound transmission direction to right only.
Displays orientation with an arrow on the orientation mark.
[Angle (Compound)] “5” to “30” Changes the Compound steering angle, in 5° units.
NOTE: The maximum steering angle range varies depending
on the probe.
[Dynamic Range (B)] “40” to “90” Changes the contrast of the B mode image in 1dB units.
[HI REZ Level] “1” to “8” Changes the level of the HI REZ image filter.
[Enh. Level (B)] “1” to “4” When [HI REZ] is “Off”, this changes the level of edge
enhancement on the B mode image.

206 | Menus ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Function menu

Menu Option Item

[Frequency (B)] “[Link]” Changes the transmit frequency.
NOTE:The configurable range varies depending on the
probe.
“[Link]” Changes the transmit frequency.
If the suffix is Rx, the value is displayed in Receive.
NOTE:The configurable range varies depending on the
probe.
[THI] “Off” Ends B mode image display with the Harmonic method.
“On” Displays a B mode image by the Harmonics method. Either
“FmT”, “WbT”, or “HdT” is displayed as the frequency
information.
[THI Mode] “FmT”, “WbT”, Sets the method to use when the Tx Mode is “Tissue
“HdT” Harmonic” on application startup.
[Coded] “Off” Ends B mode image display with the Coded transmission
method.
“On” Displays a B mode image by the Coded transmission method.
“Coded” is displayed as the frequency information.
[Image Rotation] “0 deg”, Selects the angle to which to rotate the B mode image
“90 deg”, (clockwise).
“180 deg”, Panoramic view will be displayed from “0” to “350°” with
“270 deg” rotation allowable in 10° increments.

[Line Density (B)] “1” to “4” The higher the level, the higher the Line Density, which
improves lateral resolution.
The lower the level, the lower the Line Density, which
improves the frame rate.
[Omni Plane Angle Setting] “-75 deg” to “75 Changes the transducer angle, in 5° units.
deg” NOTE:The maximum angle value varies depending on the
probe.
[Persistence (B)] “0” Cancels correlation processing (persistence) between image
frames.
“1” to “7” Changes the level of correlation processing (persistence)
between image frames.
[PRF (B/M)] “Low”, “Mid”, Changes the pulse repetition on frequency. The upper limit on
“High” pulse repetition on frequency is raised to “Low”, “Mid”, “High”,
in order.
[Invert U/L] “Off”, “On” U/L inverts the B mode image.
[Graymap (B)] “1” to “10” Applies the selected Graymap.
[Sound Speed] “1400” to “1650” Adjusts the level of sound speed adjustment corresponding to
the receive focus delay time.
Set to “1540” for the regulation speed of sound.
[Reset Brightness] If the [Brightness Level] is set to “Auto”, this discards the
acquired brightness target value.
[Puncture Guide Line] “Off” Hides the puncture guideline.
“On” Displays the puncture guideline.
[Puncture Depth Display] “Off” Hides depth measurement marks.
“On” Displays depth measurement marks.
[Puncture Guide Line Color] “Green” Displays the puncture guideline in green.
“White” Displays the puncture guideline in white.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Menus | 207
Function menu

Menu Option Item

[R-Filter (B)] “Penetration”, Set R-Filter for when the application starts.
“Standard”,
“Resolution”, “Fine”
[Angle Select (NE)] “-30deg” to Changes the angle of Graphic Line 2 in 5° units when [Needle
“30deg” Emphasis] is On.
NOTE:The maximum angle value varies depending on the
probe.
[Angle Reverse (NE)] Reverses the angle of Graphic Line 2 when [Needle Emphasis]
is On.

[Puncture Adapter Select] Displays a dialog box for selecting the puncture adapter.

[Puncture Angle Select] “**” Changes the puncture angle or the distance from ultrasonic
irradiation area to the puncture guide line or the active guide
line.
NOTE: The options and the puncture guide line positions
vary with the probe.

[Needle Emphasis] “Off”, “On” Improves the visibility of the puncture needle echo.
[Puncture Link (NE)] “Off”, “On” When [Needle Emphasis] is On, the Graphic Line 1 is displayed
as perpendicular to the puncture guide line as possible.

[Puncture Disp. Pattern] “**” Changes a puncture guide line display pattern between single
and multiple line display. Or changes the slit interval during
multiple line display.
NOTE: The options and the puncture guide line positions
vary with the probe or adapter.
[LE Reduct. (B)] “0” to “70” Adjusts low brightness compensation level for B mode images
in two steps.
[Dual Display Format] “L/R”, “U/D” Displays images on the right and left screens or top and
bottom screens in dual screen mode.

208 | Menus ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Function menu

Alternative menu

Selects a 180 degrees display position in 360 radial display.

Menu Description

[Top Display] In 360° radial display, the upper 180° portion is displayed.

[Bottom Display] In 360° radial display, the lower 180° portion is displayed.

[Left Display] In 360° radial display, the left-hand 180° portion is displayed.

[Right Display] In 360° radial display, the right-hand 180° portion is displayed.

Development Menu

[Brachytherapy]

NOTE: Please refer to separate "Instruction for use Section" for the appropriate probe.

Displays the expanded menu for Brachytherapy.

Menu Option Description

[Add] Adds a coordinate (the position of the mark) to the stored
position list.

[Delete] Deletes the selected coordinate from the stored position list.

[Table Display] “Off” Hides the stored position list.

“On” Displays the stored position list.

[Table Locate] “Off” Completes movement of the stored position list.

“On” Changes the stored position list to movable status.

[Grid Type] “A”, Displays with the selected grid.

“B”,
“C”,
“D”

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Menus | 209
Function menu

[Grid Type] is “A” [Grid Type] is [B] [Grid Type] is “C” [Grid Type] is “D”

The following menu is an alternative menu. If one of the menus is selected, the remaining menu items
will be switched off.

Menu Description

[Off] Hides grids, targets, and the stored position list.

[Grid] Display grids.

[Target] Display target.

[Color Map (B/M)]

Menu Description

“A” to “O” Colors the image with the selected color map.

210 | Menus ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Function menu

[Focus Set]

Displays the development menu for Focus Set.

Menu Option Description

[Focus Step] “1” to “4” Changes the number of focus steps in the B mode image.

[Focus Width] Changes the combination of focus positions in the B mode

image.
NOTE:The configurable range varies depending on the
probe.

[Puncture]

Displays the development menu for Puncture.

Menu Option Description

[Puncture Guide Line] “Off” Hides the puncture guideline.

“On” Displays the puncture guideline.

[Puncture Depth Display] “Off” Hides depth measurement marks.

“On” Displays depth measurement marks.

[Puncture Adapter Select] Displays a dialog box for selecting the puncture adapter.

[Puncture Guide Line Color] “Green” Displays the puncture guideline in green.

“White” Displays the puncture guideline in white.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Menus | 211
Function menu

Menu Option Description

[Puncture Disp. Pattern] “**” Changes a puncture guide line display pattern between single
and multiple line display. Or changes the slit interval during
multiple line display.
NOTE: The options and the puncture guide line positions vary
with the probe or adapter.

[Puncture Angle Select] “**” Changes the puncture angle or the distance from ultrasonic
irradiation area to the puncture guide line or the active guide
line.
NOTE: Options and the puncture guide line positions vary
with the probe.

[Needle Emphasis] “Off”, “On” Improves the visibility of the puncture needle echo.

[Angle Reverse (NE)] Reverses the angle of Graphic Line 2 when [Needle Emphasis]
is On.

[Puncture Link (NE)] “Off”, “On” When [Needle Emphasis] is On, the Graphic Line 1 is displayed
as perpendicular to the puncture guide line as possible.

[Angle Select (NE)] “-30deg” to Changes the angle of Graphic Line 2 in increments of 5
“30deg” degrees when [Needle Emphasis] is On.
NOTE: The maximum angle varies depending on the probe.

[TGC Memory]

Displays the development menu for TGC Memory.

Menu Option Description

[TGC Curve] “Normal” Applies defaults to TGC slider settings.

“Custom” Applies the position of the registered TGC slider as the slider
center.

[Registration] Registers the position of the current TGC slider as the slider
center.

[Initialize] Discards the registered TGC slider position and restores the
default.

[Gamma Curve (B)]

Displays the development menu for Gamma Curve.

212 | Menus ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Function menu

Menu Option Description

[Gamma] “-4.0” to “4.0” Changes the gamma value, in units of 0.1.

[Rejection] “0” to “255” Changes the position at which the curve rises.

[Center] “0” to “255” Changes the center position of the S-Curve Type.

[Saturation] “0” to “255” Changes the saturation position of the curve.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Menus | 213
Function menu

The following menu is an alternative menu. If one of the menus is selected, the remaining menu items
will be switched off.

Menu Description

[ ] Applies a Linear Type gamma curve.

[ ] Applies a Window Type gamma curve.

[ ] Applies a Parabolic Type gamma curve.

[ ] Applies an S-Curve Type gamma curve.

[Lateral Gain Control]

Sets the gain correction of desired positions of scanning line direction.

 Sets the gain correction of the desired position.

a Select [Lateral Gain Control].

b Adjust the slider position of the position in

concern.

 The higher the slider position, the higher the sensitivity.

To restore a changed slider position to its position before the change (the currently set position),
select [Reset].

 Apply the instrument's internal patterns.

a Select [Lateral Gain Control].

b Select the correction pattern under [LGC

Type].

214 | Menus ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Function menu

8-3-2 Function menu: M

This section explains function menus classified as M mode.

Menu Option Description

[Echo Enh. (M)] “0” Removes the echo enhancement image filter.

“1” to “7” Creates an image from a weak signal by filling gaps in the scan
direction and applying a filter to lower the brightness in
low-bright areas and increasing it in high-bright areas.

[AGC (M)] “0” Cancels auto gain correction.

“1” to “3” Applies auto gain correction. As the value increases, so does
the correction level.
AGC (Auto Gain Control) analyzes brightness in the depth
direction, suppressing spikes in echo level.

[Dynamic Range (M)] “40 dB” to “90 dB” Changes the contrast of the M mode image in 1dB units.

[Enh. Level (M)] “1” to “4” Changes the level of edge enhancement on the M mode
image.

[Sweep Speed (M)] “40.0” Changes the display movement speed (mm/s) of the M mode
“50.0” image.
“66.7” This also applies to physiological signals when the B mode
“100” image is displayed on single screen after freezing in B/M
“133” mode.
“200”
“300”

[Graymap (M)] “1” to “8” Applies the selected Graymap.

Development Menu

[Gamma Curve (M)]

Displays the development menu for Gamma Curve.

Menu Option Description

[Gamma] “-4.0” to “4.0” Changes the gamma value, in units of 0.1.

[Rejection] “0” to “255” Changes the position at which the curve rises.

[Center] “0” to “255” Changes the center position of the S-Curve Type.

[Saturation] “0” to “255” Changes the saturation position of the curve.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Menus | 215
Function menu

The following menu is an alternative menu. If one of the menus is selected, the remaining menu items
will be switched off.

Menu Description

[ ] Applies a Linear Type gamma curve.

[ ] Applies a Window Type gamma curve.

[ ] Applies a Parabolic Type gamma curve.

[ ] Applies an S-Curve Type gamma curve.

216 | Menus ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Function menu

8-3-3 Function menu: D

This section explains function menus classified as D mode (PW, CW).

Menu Option Description

[Ref. Frequency (D)] Changes the reference frequency (Transmit) when in PW

mode display.
NOTE:The configurable range varies depending on the
probe.

[Auto Angle Correction] Automatically sets the correction angle, based on color
information.

[Dual Dop. Select] “D1” When freeze is applied to 2 Direction Doppler, the Doppler
image at the D1 cursor is switched to active.

“D2” When freeze is applied to 2 Direction Doppler, the Doppler

image at the D2 cursor is switched to active.

[Invert Spectrum] “Off” Restores vertical inversion of the Doppler image.

“On” U/L inverts the Doppler image.

[Freeze Trigger] “Off” Freezing the Doppler Auto Trace hides the trace line.

“On” Displays the trace line when freeze is applied to Doppler Auto
Trace.

[Trace Smooth] “Low” Switches the level of trace smoothing of the trace line with
Doppler Auto Trace to the minimum.

“High” Switches the level of trace smoothing of the trace line with
Doppler Auto Trace to the maximum.

[Trace Locate] “Off” Ends movement of the measurement result display position in
Doppler Auto Trace.

“On” Puts the measurement result display position in Doppler Auto

Trace into a movable state.

[Trans. Menu Auto Display] Displays the transfer menu when the Doppler Auto Trace
measurement result is displayed.

[Cursor Posi. (LN/CV CW)] “Center” Switches the probe’s transmission position to the center in the
CW mode of a linear and convex probe.

“Right” Switches the probe’s transmission position to the right of

center in the CW mode of a linear and convex probe.

“Left” Switches the probe’s transmission position to the left of center

in the CW mode of a linear or convex probe.

[Adaptive Noise Rej.] “Off” Cancels noise rejection in CW mode.

“Low” Changes the noise rejection level in CW mode to a low level.

“High” Changes the noise rejection level in CW mode to a high level.

[Angle Correction] “0°” to “80°” Changes the correction angle.

[Angle Correct. Reverse] Turn the corresponding multi-rotary encoder, to reverse the
polarity of the correction angle. For example, -20° becomes
20°.

[Baseline Position] “1” to “17”, When [Auto-optimizer] is On, this changes the position to shift
“Unchanged” the baseline when compensating baseline shift in D mode.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Menus | 217
Function menu

Menu Option Description

[Baseline Shift (D)] “-16” to “16” Shifts the Doppler baseline (0 mm/s) vertically.
Shifts up and down, relative to “0” as the image center
position.

[Beam Steer (D)] “-30 deg” to “30 Changes the steering angle of the ultrasound beam in an
deg” electronic linear probe, in 5° units.
NOTE:The steering angle range varies depending on the
probe.

[Beam Steer [Skip] (D)] Switches between the angle, reverse angle and 0 degree angle
set in [Beam Steer (D)] with respect to the Doppler cursor.

[Invert Steer (D)] Switches between the angle, and reverse angle set in [Beam
Steer (D)] with respect to the Doppler cursor.

[Dual Dop. Combination] “PW/PW” Displays D1 in PW mode and D2 in PW mode in Dual Gate
Doppler.

“PW/TDI” Displays D1 in PW mode and D2 in TDI mode in Dual Gate

Doppler.

“TDI/TDI” Displays D1 in TDI mode and D2 in TDI mode in Dual Gate

Doppler.

[Trace Threshold] “-22 dB” to “0 dB” Changes the brightness value (dB) at which the trace is
detected in Doppler Auto Trace.

[Sample Volume] “0.5 mm” to “20.0 Changes the sample volume detection width (mm). It can be
mm” changed in 0.5 mm steps in the 0.5 to 10.0 mm range, and in
1.0 mm steps in the 10.0 to 20.0 mm range.
Makes the sample volume of the active Dop Cursor the target
in 2 Direction Doppler.

[Sweep Speed (D)] “40.0 mm/s” Changes the display movement speed (mm/s) in D mode.
“50.0 mm/s” This also applies to physiological signals when the B mode
“66.7 mm/s” image is displayed on single screen after freezing in B/D mode.
“100.0 mm/s”
“133.3 mm/s”
“200.0 mm/s”
“300.0 mm/s”
[Vel. Range (D)] “1.25” to “401.04” Changes the velocity range (vertical axis direction, cm/s) for
PW mode.
NOTE: The velocity range varies depending on the probe.

“24.81” to “601.56” Changes the velocity range (vertical axis direction, cm/s) for
CW mode.
NOTE: The velocity range varies depending on the probe.

[Spectrum Resolution] “Low” Reduces the number of analysis points for Doppler waveform
detection.
Doppler image detection response becomes faster, displaying
a Doppler waveform with good tracking.
“Middle” Changes the number of analysis points for Doppler waveform
detection to an intermediate level between “Low” and “High”.

“High” Increases the number of analysis points for Doppler waveform

detection.
Displays Doppler images with high resolution.

[Wall Filter (D)] “1” to “12” Changes the level of removal of unnecessary signals from wall
movement, in order to display only blood flow signal.
Raising the level raises the frequency removed.

218 | Menus ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Function menu

Menu Option Description

[Dop. Gamma] “1” to “8” Changes the Doppler waveform contrast, and the level of
gamma adjustment.
Raising the level raises the frequency removed.

[Doppler Auto Trace] “Off” Ends Doppler Auto Trace and hides the trace line and
measurement results.

Development Menu

[Trace Direction]

Displays the menu for selecting the target trace region in Doppler Auto Trace.

The following menu is an alternative menu. If one of the menus is selected, the remaining menu items
will be switched off.

Menu Description

[Toward] Changes the target trace region for Doppler Auto Trace to above the baseline.

[Away] Changes the target trace region for Doppler Auto Trace to below the baseline.

[Both] Sets the traced region for Doppler Auto Trace to both above and below the
baseline.

[Auto] Changes the target trace region for Doppler Auto Trace to switch automatically.
If the baseline is the center of the image, or below the center, the area above the
baseline is targeted.
If the baseline is above the center of the image, the area below the baseline is
targeted.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Menus | 219
Function menu

[Color Map (D)]

Menu Description

“A” to “O” Colors the Doppler waveform with the selected color map.

[Gamma Curve (D)]

Displays the development menu for Gamma Curve.

Menu Option Description

[Gamma] “-4.0” to “4.0” Changes the gamma value, in units of 0.1.

[Rejection] “0” to “255” Changes the position at which the curve rises.

[Center] “0” to “255” Changes the center position of the S-Curve Type.

[Saturation] “0” to “255” Changes the saturation position of the curve.

The following menu is an alternative menu. If one of the menus is selected, the remaining menu items
will be switched off.

Menu Description

[ ] Applies a Linear Type gamma curve.

[ ] Applies a Window Type gamma curve.

[ ] Applies a Parabolic Type gamma curve.

[ ] Applies an S-Curve Type gamma curve.

220 | Menus ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Function menu

8-3-4 Function menu: Color

This section explains function menus classified as color flow mode (CF, PD, eFlow).

Menu Option Description

[Accumu. Imaging] “Off” Hides the displayed accumulation of color pixels.

“On” Displays the accumulation of color pixels.

[Invert Color Map] “Off” Restores inverted color polarity.

“On” Inverts color polarity.

[Dual CF] “Off” Displays the tomographic image on single screen.

“On” Displays the B mode image on the left or top screen and the
Color Flow mode image on the right or bottom screen in
simultaneous dual screen mode.

[Directional] “Off” Hides the blood flow direction display in PD mode or eFlow
mode.

“On” Displays blood flow direction in PD mode or eFlow mode.

[Baseline Shift (Color)] “-64” to “64” Shifts the baseline (0 cm/s) of the color flow image vertically.
Shifts up and down, relative to “0” as the color scale center
position.

[Beam Steer (Color)] “-30 deg” to “30 Changes the steering angle of the ultrasound beam in an
deg” electronic linear probe, in 5° units.
NOTE:The steering angle range varies depending on the
probe.

[Beam Steer [Skip] (Color)] Switches between the angle, reverse angle and 0 degree angle
set in [Beam Steer (Color)] with respect to the color ROI.

[Invert Steer (Color)] Switches between the angle set in [Beam Steer (Color)] and
the reverse angle for color ROI.

[Blend] “0” to “100” Changes the color permeability in TDI mode or CHI-Color
mode.
When the motion speed of tissue is displayed in color, the
higher the permeability, the more translucent the color is and
the easier it is to see the B mode image behind.

[Accumu. Time] “0.25 sec” to “4.0 Changes the retention time for [Accumu. Imaging]. The color
sec” flow display is updated at the specified time. It can be
“8.0 sec” changed in 0.25s steps in 0.25 to 1.0 s, and in 1.0s steps in 1.0
“Conti.” to 4.0 s.
The color flow display is not updated if the setting is “Conti.”.

[Dual CF Offset Gain] “-30 dB” to “30 dB” Changes the gain compensation value to apply to B mode
gain in [Dual CF] B+CF mode.

[Vel. Range (Color)] “0.63” to “401.04” Changes the velocity range (cm/s) for Color Flow mode.
NOTE: The velocity range varies depending on the probe.

[Packet Size] “Small” Image quality is lower, but the frame rate is higher. This setting
displays a color flow image with good real time performance.

“Middle” Displays the default Color Flow mode image.

“Large” Lowers the frame rate but displays the color flow mode image
with high image quality.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Menus | 221
Function menu

Menu Option Description

[Wall Filter (Color)] “0” to “6” Changes the level of removal of unnecessary signals from wall
movement, to improve detection sensitivity for slow blood
flow.

[Wall Motion Reduction] “Off” Cancels Wall Motion Reduction.

“Low” Changes the level for removing body movement.

“Mid”
“High”

[Smoothing (Color)] “1” to “5” Changes the level for smoothing the Color Flow mode image.

[Variance Enhance.] “1” to “8” Changes the dispersion display level in the color flow mode
image.

[Persistence (Color)] “0” Cancels correlation processing (persistence) between image

frames.

“1” to “7” Changes the level of correlation processing (persistence)

between image frames.

[Line Density (Color)] “1” to “8” The higher the level, the higher the Line Density, which
improves lateral resolution.
The lower the level, the lower the Line Density, which
improves the frame rate.

[Ref. Frequency (Color)] Changes the reference frequency (Transmit) when in CF, PD, or
eFlow display.
NOTE:The configurable range varies depending on the
probe.

[Dynamic Range (Color)] “1” to “8” Changes the dynamic range in PD mode and eFlow mode
images.

[TGC Enhancement] “Off” Releases gain optimization in depth direction of color flow
mode images.

“On” Sets gain optimization in depth direction of color flow mode

images.
NOTE: TGC Enhancement is not available with some probes.
For details, refer to the “Instruction for use” volume.

222 | Menus ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Function menu

Development Menu

[Display Priority]

Displays the development menu for B mode images that are deemed to be tissue and have color flow
removed.

Menu Option Description

[BW Threshold] “0” to “16” Changes the monochrome brightness threshold value.

[BW Coefficient] “1” to “10” Changes the correction coefficient for monochrome
brightness.

The following menu is an alternative menu. If one of the menus is selected, the remaining menu items
will be switched off.

Menu Description

[Preference] Sets the monochrome brightness threshold value and coefficient for parts of the B
mode image that are deemed to be tissue and have color flow removed.
NOTE: CF mode, PD mode, and TDI mode are fixed by [Preference].

[Auto] Sets eFlow mode-specific settings for parts of the B mode image that are deemed
to be tissue and have color flow removed.
NOTE: Only eFlow mode can be selected.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Menus | 223
Function menu

[Color Map (Color)]

Menu Description

“A” to “O” Colors the color flow image with the selected color map.

224 | Menus ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Function menu

8-3-5 Function menu: DSD

This section explains function menus classified as D.S.D.

Menu Option Description

[DSD (ECG)] “Off” Ends DSD (ECG) mode.

“On” Starts DSD (ECG) mode.

[DSD Refresh] Resets the time phase of slow-motion display in DSD (ECG)
mode or DSD (Time) mode.

[DSD (Time)] “Off” Ends DSD (Time) mode.

“On” Starts DSD (Time) mode.

[DSD Speed] “1/2” Switches the playback speed of slow-motion display.

“1/3”
“1/4”
“1/10”

[DSD Refresh Timing] “1 sec” to “10 sec” Changes the refresh interval of slow-motion display in DSD
(Time) mode.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Menus | 225
Function menu

8-3-6 Function menu: FAM

This section explains function menus classified as FAM.

Menu Option Description

[FAM] “Off” Ending FAM mode

“On” Starts FAM mode. A FAM cursor is displayed on the B mode

image.

[FAM Cursor Number] “2” Displays two FAM cursors.

“3” Displays three FAM cursors.

[Active FAM disp. off] Erase (in case there are more than two FAM cursors) active
FAM cursor.

[PSAX] “Off” Displays one FAM cursor.

“On” Displays FAM cursors at uniform angles and linked at the FAM
center points.
The positions of multiple FAM cursors can be moved
simultaneously.

[Center Independence] “Off” Links multiple FAM cursors at their center points.

“On” Releases the links between FAM cursors.

[Trace Fit] “Off” Makes the length of the FAM cursors the same as the range of
the FAM image at [MAG (FAM)].

“On” Fits the displayed length of FAM cursors to the range of the B
mode image.
[MAG (FAM)] corresponds to “x1.0”.

[MAG (FAM)] “x1.0” Makes the depth magnification of the FAM image relative to
the B mode image the same as the B mode image.

“x0.5” Changes the depth magnification of the FAM image relative to

“x0.75” the B mode image.
“x1.5”
“x2.0”

[Dynamic Range (FAM)] “40 dB” to “90 dB” Changes the dynamic range in FAM mode.

[Graymap (FAM)] “1” to “8” Applies the selected Graymap.

226 | Menus ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Function menu

Development Menu

[Gamma Curve (FAM)]

Displays the development menu for Gamma Curve.

Menu Option Description

[Gamma] “-4.0” to “4.0” Changes the gamma value, in units of 0.1.

[Rejection] “0” to “255” Changes the position at which the curve rises.

[Center] “0” to “255” Changes the center position of the S-Curve Type.

[Saturation] “0” to “255” Changes the saturation position of the curve.

The following menu is an alternative menu. If one of the menus is selected, the remaining menu items
will be switched off.

Menu Description

[ ] Applies a Linear Type gamma curve.

[ ] Applies a Window Type gamma curve.

[ ] Applies a Parabolic Type gamma curve.

[ ] Applies an S-Curve Type gamma curve.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Menus | 227
Function menu

8-3-7 Function menu: Physio

This section explains function menus classified as Physio.

Menu Option Description

[ECG Display] “Off” Hides the ECG Display.

“On” Displays the ECG.

[ECG Filter] “Off” Cancels the ECG Filter.

“On” Starts the ECG Filter and displays an ECG with body movement
removed.

[Invert ECG Display] “Off” Cancels inversion of the ECG.

“On” Inverts ECG display vertically.

[PCG Display] “Off” Hides the PCG Display.

“On” Displays the PCG.

[PCG Filter] “Low”, “Med”, Starts the PCG Filter and changes the noise removal level.
“High”

[Pulse Display] “Off” Hides pulse waves.

“On” Displays pulse.

[Resp Display] “Off” Hides respiration.

“On” Displays respiration.

[Resp Display Method] “Scroll” Displays respiration as a waveform.

“Bar” Displays respiration as a bar.

[HR Stability Display] “Off” Cancels HR Stability Display.

“On” Starts HR Stability Display. Heart rate display is highlighted

once heartbeat stability is detected.

[R-R Detection] “Off” Ends R-R Detection.

“On” Starts R-R Detection.

[R-R Start Frame] Jumps to the R-R Detection sector immediately preceding the
time phase bar.

[R-R End Frame] Jumps to the R-R Detection sector immediately after the time
phase bar.

[ECG Sensitivity] “0” to “30” Changes the level of adjustment of ECG sensitivity.
The display amplitude of the ECG is increased according to the
numerical value. Level “0” displays the ECG as flat.

[ECG Position] “1” to “32” Changes ECG display position. It can be changed vertically in
32 steps.

[ECG Auto Sensitivity] “Off”, “S”, “M”, “L” Automatically adjusts ECG sensitivity.
Changing [ECG Sensitivity] turns it “Off”.

[PCG Sensitivity] “0” to “30” Changes the level of adjustment of PCG sensitivity.
The display amplitude of the PCG is increased according to the
numerical value. Level “0” displays the PCG as flat.

[PCG Position] “1” to “32” Changes PCG display position. It can be changed vertically in
32 steps.

228 | Menus ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Function menu

Menu Option Description

[Pulse Sensitivity] “0” to “30” Changes the level of adjustment of pulse sensitivity.
The display amplitude of the pulse is increased according to
the numerical value. Level “0” displays the pulse as flat.

[Pulse Position] “1” to “32” Changes pulse display position. It can be changed vertically in
32 steps.

[Resp Sensitivity] “0” to “30” Changes the level of adjustment of respiration sensitivity.
The display amplitude of respiration (waveform) is increased
according to the numerical value. Level “0” displays the
respiration waveform as flat.

[Resp Position] “1” to “32” Changes the respiration (waveform) display position. It can be
changed vertically in 32 steps.

[HR Stability Display (Ave.)] “0” to “50” Changes the allowable range (%) relative to the average heart
rate over the latest four heartbeats.

[HR Stability Display (Conti.)] “0” to “50” Changes the allowable range (%) relative to the rate of change
between two consecutive heartbeats.

[RRp/RRpp] “±5%” to “±50%” Changes the allowable variation range between the latest and
previous R-wave intervals in steps of ±5%.
TIP:If RRp/RRpp is within the allowable variation range, that
sector is judged to be a stable heartbeat sector.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Menus | 229
Function menu

8-3-8 Function menu: PinP

This section explains function menus classified as PinP.

[PinP]

The [PinP] menu is a development menu but all the sub-menus can be assigned to function menus.

Menu Option Description

[PinP Window] “Off” Hides the PinP window.

“On” Displaying the PinP Window.

The following menu is an alternative menu. If one of the menus is selected, the remaining menu items
will be switched off.
Menu for selecting the display location of the small size PinP Window
Menu Description

Displays a small-sized PinP Window in the upper left.

[ ] [Upper Left]
Displays a small-sized PinP Window in the upper right.
[ ] [Upper Right]

Displays a small-sized PinP Window in the lower left.

[ ] [Lower Left]

Displays a small-sized PinP Window in the lower right.

[ ] [Lower Right]

Menu for selecting the display size of the PinP Window

Menu Description

[Small] Displays the PinP Window in small size.

[Half] Displays the PinP Window in half size.

[Full] Displays the PinP Window in full size.

230 | Menus ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Function menu

8-3-9 Function menu: Other

This section explains function menus classified as Other.

Menu Option Description

[Power Limit Override] “Off” Restricts acoustic power in fetal applications.

“On” Overrides acoustic power restrictions in fetal application.

The acoustic power display is highlighted.

[Invert Link] “Off” [Invert Spectrum] and [Invert Color Map] are changed
individually.

“On” Links [Invert Color Map] to [Invert Spectrum].

[Counter (A)] “Off” Completes the count up and hides the counter at the top left
of the screen.

“On” Starts the count up and displays the counter on the top left of
the screen.
When frozen, the counter will stop, and the freeze counter will
be displayed to the right of the counter display.

[B/D Format] “L/R” The B mode image is displayed on the left and D mode is
displayed on the right in B/D mode.

“U/D” The B mode image is displayed on the upper side and D mode
is displayed on the lower side in B/D mode.

[B/M Format] “L/R” The B mode image is displayed on the left and M mode is
displayed on the right in B/M mode.

“U/D” The B mode image is displayed on the upper side and M mode
is displayed on the lower side in B/M mode.

[Playback Start/End] “Off” Stops cine memory image playback.

“On” Plays back captured images from cine memory.

[Print Queue] Prints print files in the print queue folder.

[Video Clip Auto Stop] “Off” Returns to real time display after a video clip is saved.

“On” Freezes the display after a video clip is saved.

[Teaching File] “Off” Cancels the masking of patient data in images output to
media other than the instrument hard disk by video clip or
video output.

“On” Masks patient data in images output to media other than the
instrument hard disk by video clip or video output.

[Logoff] “Off” (If user authentication is set) A user is using the instrument.

“On” (If user authentication is set) Ends use of the instrument and
displays the login screen.

[Thumbnail Page] Switches between pages in the thumbnail area.

[Delete All] Deletes all images.

[Disk Remain] “Off” Hides the remaining media capacity display dialog box.

“On” Displays the remaining media capacity display dialog box.

[Original] Displays the Raw playback image in its state before image
adjustment.

[Next Image] Switches to the next selected image in full screen view or
comparison display.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Menus | 231
Function menu

Menu Option Description

[Prev Image] Switches to the previous selected image in full screen view or
comparison display.

[Load Raw Data] Loads Raw data into cine and plays it.

[Sensor] Starts communication with the magnetic sensor unit.

[Audio Volume] “0” to “10” Changes the volume. “0” is mute.

[Beam Steer (C/D)] “-30 deg” to “30 Changes the steering angle of the ultrasound beam in an
deg” electronic linear probe, in 5° units. Applied simultaneously to
flow area and Dop Cursor.
NOTE:The steering angle range varies depending on the
probe.

[Beam Steer (B/C/D)] “-30 deg” to “30 Changes the steering angle of the ultrasound beam in an
deg” electronic linear probe, in 5° units. Applied simultaneously to
the B mode image, flow area and Dop Cursor.
NOTE:The steering angle range varies depending on the
probe.

[Beam Steer [Skip] (C/D)] Switches between the angle set in [Beam Steer (C/D)], the
reverse angle and 0 degrees. Applied simultaneously to the
flow area and Dop Cursor.

[Invert Steer (C/D)] Switches between the angle set in [Beam Steer (C/D)] and the
reverse angle. Applied simultaneously to flow area and D
Cursor.

[Beam Steer [Skip] (B/C/D)] Switches between the angle set in [Beam Steer (B/C/D)], the
reverse angle and 0 degrees. Applied simultaneously to the B
mode image, flow area and Dop Cursor.

[Invert Steer (B/C/D)] Switches between the angle set in [Beam Steer (B/C/D)] and
the reverse angle. Applied simultaneously to the B mode
image, flow area and D cursor.

[ECG Cycle] “1” to “10” Changes the play range and image save range that are set in
terms of heart rate.

[Time Cycle] “1” to “16” Changes the play range and image save range that are set in
“30” terms of Time (s).
“45”
“60”
“75”
“90”

[Playback Speed] “1 Hz” to (captured If the Playback Speed Unit is “Frame Rate” in the Common tab
frame rate) of the preset ([Preset Setup > Filing]), the image playback
speed changes with the frame rate.

“×1” If the Playback Speed Unit is “Ratio” in the Common tab of the
“×1/2” preset ([Preset Setup > Filing]), the image playback speed
“×1/4” changes as a ratio of the frame rate when captured.
“×1/8”
“×1/16”

[Counter (B)] “Off” Completes the count up and hides the counter at the top left
of the screen.

“On” Starts the count up and displays the counter on the top left of
the screen.
When frozen, the counter will stop, and the freeze counter will
be displayed to the right of the counter display.

232 | Menus ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Function menu

Menu Option Description

[R-Wave Beep] “Off”, “On” Sounds or turns off the beep sound when the R-wave is
detected.

[R-Delay Time] “0.00 s” to “2.55 s” (CHI mode) Changes the time phase of contrast-enhanced
image display to synchronize with the ECG in steps of 0.01s.
Displays the contrast-enhanced image at a time phase
delayed by the set time from the R-wave.

[REC] “Off” Stops recording to DVD.

“On” Starts recording to DVD.

[Manual] “On”, “Off” Displays the instruction manual selection menu screen.

[Parameter Display] “On”, “Off” Displays the Frequency (B), display range, B Gain value, and
Dynamic Range value at the analysis screen.

[Trimming] Saves part of a moving image.

Alternative menu

If one of the menus is selected, the remaining menu items will be switched off.

 Switching QSS presets

NOTE: The name is the factory default setting. Names can be changed in presets, so names other than A to D
may be displayed.

Menu Description

[QSS A] Applies QSS A presets.

[QSS B] Applies QSS B presets.

[QSS C] Applies QSS C presets.

[QSS D] Applies QSS D presets.

 Switching the Display Screen

Menu Description

[Current View] Displays the analysis screen.

[Full Screen View] Displays the selected image (thumbnail) on full screen.

[Image Compare] Displays the selected image on the left and the examination image on the right, in
dual screen.

[Tile View] Displays a list of images with the same ID as the current patient ID.

[Find] Displays the search screen.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Menus | 233
Function menu

Development Menu

[Loop Mode (Img Compare)]

Displays the Playback Mode of [Image Compare] mode in the expanded menu.
The following menu is an alternative menu. If one of the menus is selected, the remaining menu items
will be switched off.

Menu Description

[ECG Sync] Resets loop playback of the Raw video play to synch with the R-wave when the
ECG is displayed on the analysis screen.

[Free Run] Displays the Raw video play image as it is when the ECG is displayed on the
analysis screen.
This state applies if the ECG is not displayed on the analysis screen, or if the images
playing are not Raw video.

[TI Display]

Displays the display method for thermal index in the expanded menu.

The following menu is an alternative menu. If one of the menus is selected, the remaining menu items
will be switched off.

Menu Description

[TIS] Displayed using the thermal index for soft tissue (TIS).

[TIB] Displayed using the thermal index for cranium (TIB).

[TIC] Displayed using the thermal index for bone (TIC).

234 | Menus ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Function menu

[Counter Set Up]

Displays the Counter menu on the development menu.

Menu Option Description

[Counter (A)] “Off” Completes the count up and hides the counter at the top left
of the screen.

“On” Starts the count up and displays the counter on the top left of
the screen.
When frozen, the counter will stop, and the freeze counter will
be displayed to the right of the counter display.

[Counter (B)] “Off” Completes the count up and hides the counter at the top left
of the screen.

“On” Starts the count up and displays the counter on the top left of
the screen.
When frozen, the counter will stop, and the freeze counter will
be displayed to the right of the counter display.

[Base Time (A) Setting] “Off” The counter starts counting up from 00:00:00.

“On” The counter starts counting up from [Base Time (A)

Hour]:[Base Time (A) Min]:[Base Time (A) Sec].

[Base Time (A) Hour] “00” to “23” Changes the base time (hours).

[Base Time (A) Min] “00” to “59” Changes the base time (minutes).

[Base Time (A) Sec] “00” to “59” Changes the base time (seconds).

[Counter (A) Offset] “-59” to “0” Changes the Counter (A) offset time (seconds).

[Counter (B) Offset] “-59” to “0” Changes the Counter (B) offset time (seconds).

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Menus | 235
Function menu

[Playback Mode]

The following menu is an alternative menu. If one of the menus is selected, the remaining menu items
will be switched off.

Menu Description

[Short] Matches up to the image with the shortest time phase and plays back. The
playback of images with long playback times will end part-way through.

[Long] Matches up to the image with the longest time phase and plays back. The
playback of images with short playback times will stop on the last frame.

[Align] Matches up to the image with the longest time phase and plays back. Adjusts the
playback speed so that images with short playback times will end at the same time
as the image with the longest playback time.

[Free Run] Plays back every image without synchronizing.

[Monitor/Panel Setup]

Displays the development menu related to the brightness of the monitor, operation panel and touch
panel.

Menu Option Description

[Monitor Brightness] “1” to “10” Changes the brightness of the monitor.

[Monitor Contrast] “1” to “10” Changes the contrast of the monitor.

[Monitor Back Light] “1” to “10” Changes the monitor backlight.

[Monitor Scaling] “Small”, “Medium”, Changes the scaling of the monitor.

“Large”

[Monitor Color Temp] “Low”, “Medium”, Changes the color temperature of the monitor.
“High”

[Panel LED Brightness] “Low”, “Medium”, Changes the brightness of the operation panel (key
“High” illumination LEDs).

[Touch PNL Brightness] “1” to “10” Changes the brightness of the touch panel display.

236 | Menus ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Function menu

The following menu is an alternative menu. If one of the menus is selected, the remaining menu items
will be switched off.

Menu Contents

[Type A] Applies Type A batch setting to the LED brightness settings for the monitor,
operation panel, and touch panel.

[Type B] Applies Type B batch setting to the LED brightness settings for the monitor,
operation panel, and touch panel.

[Type C] Applies Type C batch setting to the LED brightness settings for the monitor,
operation panel, and touch panel.

[Acquisition Mode]

Displays the development menu for moving image video acquisition.

The following menu is an alternative menu. If one of the menus is selected, the remaining menu items
will be switched off.

Menu Contents

[Pre (Time)] After pressing the [Store] key, tracks back the time configured in the [Time Cycle]
and saves the image.

[Pre (ECG)] After pressing the [Store] key, tracks back the time configured in the [ECG Cycle]
and saves the image.

[Post (Time)] After pressing the [Store] key, saves the image at the specified time configured in
the [Time Cycle].

[Post (ECG)] After pressing the [Store] key, saves the image at the specified time configured in
the [ECG Cycle].

[Manual] Saves images between when the [Store] key is pressed once, and then when the
[Store] key is pressed again.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Menus | 237
Function menu

[Data Format (Still)]

Displays the development menu for still image acquisition.

The following menu is an alternative menu. If one of the menus is selected, the remaining menu items
will be switched off.

Menu Description

[RGB] Changes the save format for still images to [RGB].

[RGB+Raw] Changes the save format for still images to [RGB+Raw].

[Data Format (Movie)]

Displays the development menu for moving image video acquisition.

The following menu is an alternative menu. If one of the menus is selected, the remaining menu items
will be switched off.

Menu Description

[RGB+Raw] Changes the save format for video to [RGB+Raw].

[Video Clip] Changes the save format for video to [Video Clip].

238 | Menus ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Function menu

[Store Media]

Displays the development menu for selecting a save destination.

The following menu is an alternative menu. If one of the menus is selected, the remaining menu items
will be switched off.

Menu Description

[HDD] Changes the image save destination to the instrument hard disk.

[USB] Changes the save destination to USB-connected media.

[CD-R Buffer] Changes the save destination to the CD-R Buffer.

[DVD] Changes the save destination to DVD drive.

[NET (DICOM)] Changes the save destination to network. Changes the save format for images to
DICOM.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Menus | 239
Function menu

[Mask Item (Video)]

Configures the masking for the following categories when patient data are masked in images output to
media other than the instrument hard disk by video clip or video output.

Menu Option Description

[Hosp. &Sonographer] “Off” Displays hospital name and sonographer name.

“On” Masks hospital name and sonographer name.

[Age] “Off” Displays patient's age.

“On” Masks patient's age.

[Sex] “Off” Displays patient's sex.

“On” Masks patient's sex.

[QSS Registration]

Reflect the current status of the analysis screen in QSS presets.

1 Select [QSS Registration].

2 Select the preset to copy to, from [A], [B], [C], and [D].

3 Select [Copy Execute].

 The current status of the analysis screen is copied to the selected QSS preset.

If [Exit] is selected instead of [Copy Execute], the expanded menu is closed without copying.

240 | Menus ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Function menu

[Graphic Color]

Configures the development menu for graphics such as on-screen scales, and for color patterns in auto
displays etc.

The following menu is an alternative menu. If one of the menus is selected, the remaining menu items
will be switched off.

Menu Description

[A] Displays graphics and text with the selected color setting pattern.
[B] A sample is displayed on the screen.
[C] [User] is a color setting pattern set with the [Graphic Editor].
[D]
[E]
[User]

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Menus | 241
Function menu

[Graphic Editor]

Configures the development menu for graphics such as on-screen scales, and for color settings in auto
displays etc.

Set colors can be selected for [User] under [Graphic Color].

1 Select the [Graphic Editor].

2 Select the color to edit.

Menus and their content

Selection Main target

[Assist Message] Assist messages, scales, body marks, patient data, image information, etc.
[Meas. Result] Text colors for measurement results
[Meas. Background] Background color of measurement results
[Comment Character] Color of comment text
[Active Meas. Caliper] Active measurement caliper, active FAM cursor, MD cursor, flow area, active
Dual Gate Doppler cursor
[Inactive Meas. Caliper] Inactive measurement caliper, inactive FAM cursor, inactive Dual Gate
Doppler cursor
[Probe mark (Body M.)] Probe marks displayed within body marks
[Physio Signal] ECG, physiological waveforms

3 Configure the corresponding multi rotary encoders to [R], [G], and [B] for each value.
 The color of the editing subject changes on the screen display sample.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to edit the subject colors.

5 Select [Close] once finishing.

242 | Menus ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Function menu

8-3-10 Function menu: Find/Tile

This section explains function menus in Find View or Tile View.
The function menus listed in this section are only displayed in Find View or Tile View. They are not
displayed on the analysis screen.
The Find/Tile function menu is of either the One-shot or the alternative type.

Menu Name Description

[Delete] Deletes the selected images.
[Copy (Local HD)] Copies the selected images to the instrument hard disk.
[Copy (USB)] Copies the selected images to the USB-connected media.
[Copy (CD-R Buffer)] Copies the selected images to the CD-R buffer.
[Copy (DVD)] Copies the selected images to DVD media.
[PC Format (USB)] Saves the selected images to USB-connected media in a PC format (BMP, JPEG, TIFF,
AVI, WMV, or MP4).
[PC Format (CD-Buffer)] Saves the selected images to the CD-R buffer in a PC format (BMP, JPEG, TIFF, AVI, WMV,
or MP4).
[PC Format (DVD)] Saves the selected images to DVD media in a PC format (BMP, JPEG, TIFF, AVI, WMV, or
MP4).
[PC Format (Net Folder)] Saves the selected images to a network folder in a PC format (BMP, JPEG, TIFF, AVI,
WMV, or MP4).
[Network] Sends the selected images to a network server.
[Print (DICOM)] Prints the selected images from a DICOM printer on the network.
[Print (Local)] Prints the selected images from a local (connected to the instrument) printer.
[Zoom In] Displays the selected image enlarged. The magnification changes sequentially to ×1.4,
×2.0, ×2.8, ×4.0 each time it is selected.
[Zoom Out] Displays the selected image reduced. The magnification changes sequentially to ×2.8,
×2.0, ×1.4, ×1.0 each time it is selected.
[Original Size] Displays the selected image at the same size as the original.
[Rotate 180 deg] Rotates the selected image 180°.
[Rotate R 90 deg] Rotates the selected image 90° clockwise.
[Rotate L 90 deg] Rotates the selected image 90° counterclockwise.
[Direction Up/Down] U/L inverts the selected image.
[Direction R/L] L/R inverts the selected image.
[Reset Image] Resets inversion and rotation of the selected image.
[Select All] Selects all images from the displayed study.
[Deselect All] Deselects all images from the displayed study.
[File Form. All] Displays all images.
[File Form. Still] Displays only still images.
[File Form. Movie] Displays only video.
[File Form. Raw] Displays only images in RGB+Raw format.
[File Form. Stress] Displays only stress echo images.
[Current View] Switches to the analysis screen.
[Full Screen View] Displays the selected image on full screen.
[Image Compare] Displays the selected image on the left and the examination image on the right, in
dual screen.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Menus | 243
Function menu

Menu Name Description

[Tile View] Displays a list of images with the same ID as the current patient ID.
[Find] Displays the search screen.
[Copy All (Local HD)] Copies all images to the instrument hard disk.
[Copy All (USB)] Copies all images to the USB-connected media.
[Copy All (CD-R Buffer)] Copies all images to the CD-R buffer.
[Copy All (DVD)] Copies all images to DVD media.
[Network (Preset)] Sends the selected images to the network server set in the preset.
[Network All (Preset)] Sends all the selected images to the network server set in the preset.
[Print All (DICOM)] Prints all images from a DICOM printer on the network.
[Print All (Local)] Prints all images from a local (connected to the instrument) printer.
[Delete All] Deletes all images.
[Delete CD-R Buffer] Deletes all images from the CD-R buffer.
[Deselect All Patients] Cancels all image selections.
[DVD Format] Formats DVD media.
[Disk Remain] Displays remaining media capacity.
[Burning CD] Writes the data in the CD-R buffer to a CD-R.
[TDI Analysis] Starts TDI analysis.
[CHI Analysis] Starts CHI analysis.
[3D Reconstruction] Reconstructs and displays a 3D image of the selected image.
[eTRACKING] Starts eTRACKING analysis, FMD analysis, or WI analysis.
[Stress Echo Load] Loads stress echo data.
[2D Tissue Tracking] Starts 2D Tissue Tracking analysis.
[RVS] Starts Real-time Virtual Sonography.
[Search] (Find View only) Finds patient data matching the set conditions.
[Item Clear] (Find View only) Clears search conditions.
[History Clear] (Find View only) Clears the search history of patient IDs, patient names, and study IDs.

[Next Image] Switches to the next selected image in full screen view.

[Prev Image] Switches to the previously selected image in full screen view.

244 | Menus ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 9 Presets

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 245
Overview

9-1 Overview

A preset is a function that registers the instrument’s initial status in advance for ease of use. The basic
settings for this instrument during initial activation (“System Preset”), the probe-dependent parameter
settings (“Application”), as well as the probe-independent parameter settings (“Region”) are registered.
Applications can be added, deleted, exported, imported, etc.
Presets are composed as follows:

SystemPreset Common parameter settings within the instrument

Application Parameter settings dependent on the probe
Region Parameter settings independent of the probe
Measurement Settings related to measurement*1
Filing Parameter settings related to image output and playback
Input Device Function assignment for switches and menus
Dictionary Settings for user and system dictionaries
ColorMap Color map menu choice setting

*1. Refer to the separate "Measurement Section".

246 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 System Presets

9-2 System Presets

System presets set common parameters on the instrument.

1 Press the [Probe/Preset] key.

2 Select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

3 Select “SystemPreset”.

4 Select a category.
SystemPreset Categories

Classification Description
General Basic instrument parameters
Monitor/Panel Brightness adjustment for the monitor, operation panel, and touch panel
Trackball Trackball sensitivity setting
Filing Parameters related to image output
DICOM DICOM-related settings
Stress Echo Stress echo protocol settings*1
RVS RVS-related settings*2
Shear Wave Meas. Shear Wave Measurement-related settings *3

*1. Refer to the separate “Stress Echo Section.”

*2. Refer to the separate “Real-time Virtual Sonography Section.”
*3. Refer to the separate “Shear Wave Measurement Section.”

5 Select the tab.

6 Edit the parameters.

Initializing the parameters
Select [Initialize]. This changes the parameters in the displayed classifications to the factory default
settings.

7 Select [Save] to save settings.

8 Select [Close] to return to the examination screen.

In the case of the following message “ Save changes to preset data?”
Select [Yes] to store changes.

Select [No] to close preset screen without saving changes.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 247
System Presets

9-2-1 General
Presets classified as General are arranged in three tabs.

 Common 1

 Common 2

 Hospital Info.

Common 1tab

Date/Time

Parameter Option Description

Setting Display the Windows “Date and Time Properties.” The set date and
time are reflected in the system.
Date Format “YY/MM/DD” Set the date display format for the instrument.
“[Link],YY” MMM is the first three characters of the month, in English. MM
“[Link],'YY” indicates the month numerically.
“DD-MMM-YY”
“DD-MM-'YY”

Shut down

Parameter Option Description

Power Button “Selectable” Select [Shutdown] or [Hibernation] to turn the power off.
Behavior
“Shutdown” Completely shuts down the system when the power is turned off.
“Hibernation” Hibernates the system when the power is turned off.
Starts up the system faster than after a [Shutdown] the next time it is
powered up.
Power Off Waiting “0” to “60” Sets the waiting period before for power cutoff.
Time (s)

Screen Saver

Parameter Option Description

Screen Saver Display “On”, “Off” Sets screen saver usage.
Screen Saver “All Season” Sets the screen saver screen.
“Fireworks”
“Fallen Leaves”
“Snow”
“Ribbon”
“Hospital Name”

248 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 System Presets

Timer Freeze

Parameter Option Description

Timer Freeze “On”, “Off” Sets screen saver usage.
Timer Freeze, Time “1” to “20” Sets the screen saver screen.

ID Setting

Parameter Option Description

Unit (Height) “cm”, “m”, “feet/inch” Sets the unit for height.
Unit (Weight) “kg”, “pound” Sets the unit for weight.
Sex “(BLANK)”, “Male”, Sets sex.
“Female”, “Other”
Autocomplete “On”, “Off” The subject ID and/or subject name beginning with the first one or
Setting two letters inputted are displayed when you type them.
BSA Equation “Du Bois”, “Boyd”, Sets the equation to use for calculating body surface area on the ID
“Shintani” screen.
GA/EDC Calculation “LMP”, “BBT”, “EGA”, Sets the method for calculating the gestational week and expected
“EDC”, “GA” confinement date on the ID screen.
Menstrual Data “LMP”, “BBT” Sets the method for entering the menstrual date on the ID screen.

Display

Parameter Option Description

Parameter Display “On”, “Off” Sets the Auto display (frequency (B), display range, B gain value,
dynamic range value, etc.) in the image display area.
Info. Display Position “Lower”, “Upper” Sets the position for Auto display (frequency (B), display range, B gain
value, dynamic range value, etc.) in the image display area.
Grid Type “A”, “B”, “C”, “D” Set the grid type for Brachytherapy.
MI, TI Display when “On”, “Off” Sets the MI and TI display to use when the image is frozen.
Frozen
Graphic Color “A”, “B”, “C”, “D”, “E”, Set the graphic and font colors.
“User” The “User” configures the color registered in [Graphic Editor] under
the menu.
Frequency “Transmit”, “Receive” Sets the frequency information in Tissue Harmonic Mode to Transmit
Information or Receive.
Info. Display Position “Lower”, “Upper” Sets the position for Auto display (frequency (B), display range, B gain
(2B U/D) value, dynamic range value, etc.) in the image display area in vertical
dual screen mode.

Zoom Setting

Parameter Option Description

Reverse Depth “On” Turn the [PAN ZOOM/DEPTH] key clockwise to reduce an image and
Control turn it counterclockwise to magnify it.
“Off” Turn the [PAN ZOOM/DEPTH] key clockwise to magnify an image and
turn it counterclockwise to reduce it.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 249
System Presets

Common 2 tab

Significant Figure

Parameter Option Description

ABDOM “Standard” Set the number of digits to display for measurement results for each
“Extended” region.
OBST
“Setting1” “Standard”: Depends on scale.
GYN “Setting2” “Extended”: Displayed as “***.** mm, **.***cm”.
CARDIO (Common “Setting 1”: Displayed as “***.** mm, **.***cm”.
parameters) “Setting 2”: Displayed as “***.** mm, **.***cm”.
VASCULAR
SMALL PARTS
UROLOGY
OTHER

Hospital [Link]

Parameter Option Description

Hospital Name Enter the hospital name in up to 40 characters.
The name input here is displayed on the analysis screen.
Local Machine: Enter the department name within the hospital in up to 64
Department characters.
Local Machine: Enter the address of the hospital in up to 128 characters.
Address

250 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 System Presets

9-2-2 Monitor/Panel
Sets the brightness of the monitor, operation panel, and touch panel.

Type A, Type B, Type C

Make a batch setting of parameters related to the brightness of the monitor, operation panel, and touch
panel.

Monitor

Parameter Option Description

Brightness “1” to “10” Sets the brightness of the monitor.
Contrast “1” to “10” Sets the contrast of the monitor.
Color Temp. “Low”, “Medium”, Sets the color temperature of the monitor.
“High”
Back Light “1” to “10” Sets the monitor backlight.
Scaling “Small”, “Medium”, Sets the scaling of the monitor.
“Large”

Touch panel

Parameter Option Description

Brightness “1” to “10” Sets the brightness of the touch panel.

Panel LED

Parameter Option Description

Brightness “Low”, “Medium”, Sets the LED brightness of the operation panel.
“High”

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 251
System Presets

9-2-3 Trackball
Sets the sensitivity of the trackball.

Sensitivity

Parameter Option Description

M&FAM Cursor “-50” to “50” Sets the sensitivity of the trackball for each parameter.
(Common With “0” as the standard, minus is slower response, and plus is faster.
PW&CW Cursor
parameters)
PW&CW&SWM
Cursor*1
CF Scan Area
Measurement
Probe Mark
Cine Search
Pointer
Focus
Other

*1. The optional SOP-ARIETTA70-73 is required.

252 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 System Presets

9-2-4 Filing
Sets image output.

Archive tab

Archive Group

This preset sets Archive Group1 to Archive Group5.

NOTE: This preset can only save still images.

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select the “SystemPreset”, “Filing”, and Archive tabs in that order.

3 Select a group from Archive group.

4 This preset sets the output method during real-time display mode in the Assign Function's
Real-time field.

5 This preset sets up to 3 output methods after freezing in the Assign Function's Freeze field.

6 Set Archive Group output layout in Format Type.

7 Select [Save] to save settings.

8 Select [Close] to return to inspection screen.

If the “Save changes to preset data?” message is displayed
Select [Yes] to store changes.

Select [No] to close preset screen without saving changes.

Format Type

Parameter Option Description

USB “DICOM”, “JPEG”, Sets the data save formats to use when saving to USB, CD-R Buffer, or
“BMP”, “TIFF” DVD.
CD-R Buffer
DVD

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 253
System Presets

Printer/Recorder tab

Local Printer

Parameter Option Description

Printer Select (B/W) “SSZ-D310” Set the monochrome printer.
“UP-D897”
“P95D”
“SSZ-X311”
“UP-X898MD”
Printer Select (Color) “SSZ-D710” Set the color printer.
“UP-D25MD”
“CP30D”
Number of Pages to “1” to “3” Sets the number of continuous prints with a monochrome printer.
Print

Review tab

Thumbnail Layout

Parameter Option Description

Layout “4×1” Sets the display layout (row x column) for the thumbnail area.
“8×2”

Auto Select

Parameter Option Description

When thumbnails are “Select All” Sets the selection status of thumbnails in Tile View or in the
displayed in the Tile “Deselect All” thumbnail area.
View or thumbnail
area.

Double Click (Find)

Parameter Option Description

When an image is “Tile” Move the pointer to the thumbnail in the Find View, then set the
double clicked on “Full Screen” screen, which is displayed when the [Enter] key is pressed twice.
the Find screen.

Order (Review)

Parameter Option Description

Set the order of “Old to New” Sets the display sequence for thumbnails in Tile View.
thumbnail display in “New to Old”
Tile View.

254 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 System Presets

Auto Loop (Tile)

Parameter Option Description

Loop playback of the “On”, “Off” Sets the playback of thumbnails (video) in Tile View.
thumbnails of Video
Clip images in the
Tile View.

Detail tab

Auto Delete

Parameter Option Description

Auto Image Delete “Off” Under this setting, saved images are not deleted.
“Storage Delete images from the instrument hard disk for which the retention
Commitment” time has elapsed after commitment reception (icons for these
images are blue). These images are deleted the first time the
instrument is switched on after the retention time has elapsed.
“Time” Among the images for which the retention time has elapsed after
saving to the instrument hard disk, delete only those set with Delete
Object. These images are deleted the first time the instrument is
switched on after the retention time has elapsed.
Delete Object “All images” Under this setting, all images saved to the instrument hard disk are
deleted.
“Clipped or sent Sets images which have been output from the instrument hard disk
images” to external media (with cyan icons) and images which have been
transferred to the server (with orange or blue icons) for deletion.
Holding TIme (0-60) “Day”, “Week”, Sets the storage time on the instrument of images saved from the
“Month” instrument hard disk to external media or sent to a server.
Select type from “Day”, “Week”, or “Month”, and set numeric values.

Compression Data

Parameter Option Description

JPEG Q Factor (50-99) “50” to “99” Sets the image compression rate to use when the transfer syntax is
JPEG.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 255
System Presets

Network Folder tab

Sets the address of the connected network folder

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select “SystemPreset”, “Filing” and Network Folder tab.

3 Enter the IP address of the destination in the network folder text box.

4 Select [Access].
 A connection test of the network folder starts.

Examination Results The following message is displayed when the connection test ends.

NOTE: An authentication dialog box is displayed when authentication is required. Enter the correct user name and
password of the destination.

Message Status
“Access successful.” A successful connection was established.
“Cannot access this PC.” Failed to establish a connection.
The PC cannot be found in the specified path.
Consult the network administrator of the hospital network.
“Cannot access this folder” Failed to establish a connection.
The folder cannot be found in the specified path.
Cannot access the folder.
Consult the network administrator of the hospital network.

256 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 System Presets

9-2-5 Network Settings

This section describes how to set network parameters.
Settings include instrument settings, wired network settings and wireless network settings.

Instrument Settings

Parameter Option Description

Station Name Sets the station name of the instrument.

Wired Network Connection, Wireless Network Connection

Use Wired Network Connection to set up a wired network connection.

Use Wireless Network Connection to set up a wireless network connection.

Parameter Option Description

Obtain an IP Address “On”, “Off” This setting automatically acquires an IP address via the DHCP server.
from a DHCP server
Use the following IP “On”, “Off” Sets a fixed IP address.
address NOTE: Requires IP Address, Router1 and Subnet Mask settings.
IP Address Sets the IP address of the instrument.
Router1 Sets router 1 for the instrument.
Router2 Sets router 2 for the instrument.
Subnet Mask Set the sub-net mask of the instrument.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 257
System Presets

9-2-6 DICOM
Set DICOM related parameters.

Common tab

Parameter Option Description

Private Tag “None” No private tag is assigned.
“Put into File” Sets assignment of a private tag when saving DICOM data to external
media.
“Put into Network” Sets assignment of a private tag when sending DICOM data to a
server.
“Put into Both.” Sets assignment of a private tag when saving DICOM data to external
media or transferring it to a server.
“Put into Sets assignment of a private tag when saving DICOM data to external
File+DICOMDIR” media. Sets to also assign a private tag to DICOMDIR.
“Put into All” Sets assignment of a private tag when saving DICOM data to external
media or transferring it to a server. Sets to also assign a private tag to
DICOMDIR.
Attach Thumbnail “On” Produce thumbnail data within folder and DICOMDIR.
“Off” Creates thumbnail data only in a folder.
“Off (PDI)” Does not produce thumbnail data in the folder nor in DICOMDIR.

Store on Disk

Sets items related to the saving of images on external media.

Parameter Option Description
Syntax “Implicit Little” Sets transfer syntax.
“Explicit Little” NOTE: You can select “Implicit Little”, “Explicit Little” or “RLE
“RLE Lossless” Lossless” for still images.
“JPEG Baseline”
NOTE: You can only select “JPEG Baseline” for a video clip.
DICOM+Raw “On”, “Off” Sets the assignment of Raw data when saving images in DICOM
format.

Send to Storage

Sets items related to the transferring of images to the network.

Parameter Option Description
Photometric “RGB” Sets the transfer method for color images.
“Monochrome2”
JPEG Q Factor “50” to “99” Sets the compression ratio when Syntax has been configured to“JPEG
Baseline”.
NOTE: The smaller the value, the higher the compressibility.
Dicom+Raw “On”, “Off” Sets the assignment of Raw data when saving images in DICOM
format.
Window Center “0” to “255” Sets the moderate brightness value to DICOM Tag (0028,1050) when
Photometric is “Monochrome2”.

258 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 System Presets

Parameter Option Description

Window Width “1” to “256” Sets the brightness width to DICOM Tag (0028,1051) when
Photometric is “Monochrome2”.

Ultrasound Equipment

Sets instrument network settings.

Parameter Option Description
AE Title Enter the AE name of the instrument in up to 16 characters.
Port# “0” to “65535” Sets the port No. of the instrument.
QR Port# “0” to “65535” Sets the port No. used by DICOM QR.

Server/Worklist tab

Setting Up The Server

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select the Server/Worklist tab from the “DICOM” under “SystemPreset”.

3 Enter information about the network server.

Network server setting items

Parameter Option Description

AE Title Enter the AE name for the network server in up to 16 characters.
Station Name Sets the computer name of the network server.
IP Address Sets the IP address of the network server.
Port# “0” to “65535” Sets the port No. of the network server.
The DICOM standard setting is “104”.
Monochrome Single “On”, “Off” Determines that still images are transferred differently depending
Sending on their format (RGB transfer for images that include color images
and Monochrome2 format for monochrome images) when Net
(DICOM) is set as the destination.
Multi “On”, “Off” Determines that moving images are transferred differently
depending on their format (RGB transfer for moving images that
include color images and Monochrome2 format for monochrome
moving images) when Net (DICOM) is set as the destination.
All Images of Study “On”, “Off” When the preset ([Preset Setup > SystemPreset > DICOM > SR]) [SR
Auto Creation] is “On”, SR files and images are sent.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 259
System Presets

4 Put a check mark on the server to send images to.

Setting the destination server
Multi: Select the server to send moving images to.

Single: Select the server to send still images to.

Remote1
Remote2

Remote3

Remote4

Remote5

5 If the Worklist and image storage services have different AE Titles, set steps 2 - 3 in the same
way for the Worklist server.

260 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 System Presets

Checking the TCP/IP or C-ECHO for the Network Server

Preliminary check Enter all the network settings (4 items) for the target server.

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select the Server/Worklist tab from the “DICOM” under “SystemPreset”.

3 Switch the radio button for the target network server On.

4 Select [Remote Ping] to check TCP/IP function, and [Remote C-ECHO] to confirm the retention
of DICOM handling functions.
 Starts instrument examination.

Examination Results The following message is displayed when the test is complete.

Message Status

“Ping check to *******.******* succeeded.” TCP/IP is functioning normally.

“Ping check to *******.******* failed.” TCP/IP is not functioning.

Consult network administrator of the hospital network.

“Echo check to *******.******* succeeded.” DICOM functions are being maintained.

“Echo check to *******.******* failed.” DICOM functions are not being maintained.
Consult network administrator of the hospital network.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 261
System Presets

Checking the TCP/IP or C-ECHO for the Worklist

Preliminary check Enter all the network settings (4 items) for the Worklist server.

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select the Server/Worklist tab from the “DICOM” under “SystemPreset”.

3 Switch the radio button for the Worklist server On.

4 Select [WorkList Ping] to check TCP/IP function, and [WorkList C-ECHO] to confirm the
retention of DICOM handling functions.
 Starts instrument examination.

Examination Results The following message is displayed when the test is complete.

Message Status

“Ping check to *******.******* succeeded.” TCP/IP is functioning normally.

“Ping check to *******.******* failed.” TCP/IP is not functioning.

Consult network administrator of the hospital network.

“Echo check to *******.******* succeeded.” DICOM functions are being maintained.

“Echo check to *******.******* failed.” DICOM functions are not being maintained.
Consult network administrator of the hospital network.

262 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 System Presets

QR tab

Setting Up The Server

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select the QR tab from the “DICOM” under “SystemPreset”.

3 Enter information about the network server.

Network server setting items

Parameter Option Description

AE Title Enter the AE name for the network server in up to 16 characters.
Station Name Sets the computer name of the network server.
IP Address Sets the IP address of the network server.
Port# “0” to “65535” Sets the port No. of the network server.
The DICOM standard setting is “104”.
QR Port# “0” to “65535” Sets the QR port No. of the instrument.

4 Switch the radio button for the server to send images to On.

Checking the TCP/IP or C-ECHO for the Network Server

Preliminary check Enter all the network settings (4 items) for the target server.

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select the QR tab from the “DICOM” under “SystemPreset”.

3 Switch the radio button for the target server On.

4 Select [Ping] to check TCP/IP function, and [C-ECHO] to confirm the retention of DICOM
handling functions.
 Starts instrument examination.

Examination Results The following message is displayed when the test is complete.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 263
System Presets

Message Status

“Ping check to *******.******* succeeded.” TCP/IP is functioning normally.

“Ping check to *******.******* failed.” TCP/IP is not functioning.

Consult network administrator of the hospital network.

“Echo check to *******.******* succeeded.” DICOM functions are being maintained.

“Echo check to *******.******* failed.” DICOM functions are not being maintained.
Consult network administrator of the hospital network.

264 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 System Presets

MPPS/Commitment tab

Make settings for the MPPS server or Storage Commitment server.

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select the MPPS/Commitment tab from the “DICOM” under “SystemPreset”.

3 Enter information about the MPPS server.

MPPS Server settings

Parameter Option Description

AE Title Enter the AE name for the network server in up to 16 characters.
Station Name Sets the computer name of the network server.
IP Address Sets the IP address of the network server.
Port# “0” to “65535” Sets the port No. of the network server.
The DICOM standard setting is “104”.

4 Set step 2 in the same way for the Storage Commitment server.
Storage Commitment Settings Categories

Parameter Option Description

Transaction limit “1” to “60” Set the waiting time for reply from the Storage Commitment server
after sending image.
NOTE:Once the set time has elapsed, replies will no longer be
accepted.

Select the type from “hour”, “day”, and “week” after inputting a
numeric value.
“Unlimited” Set to continue waiting for a reply from the Storage Commitment
server.
Retries “0” to “99” Sets the number of resend attempts if there is no response after an
image is sent.
If the setting is “0”, an error message is displayed with no retry
attempts.
“Unlimited” Set to continually retransmit until there is a reply from Storage
Commitment server.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 265
System Presets

Checking the TCP/IP or C-ECHO for MPPS

Preliminary check Enter all the network settings (4 items) for the target server.

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select the MPPS/Commitment tab from the “DICOM” under “SystemPreset”.

3 Switch the radio button for the target server On.

4 Select [Ping] within the MPPS Server area to check TCP/IP function, and [C-ECHO] within the
MPPS Server area to confirm the retention of DICOM handling functions.
 Starts instrument examination.

Examination Results The following message is displayed when the test is complete.

Message Status

“Ping check to *******.******* succeeded.” TCP/IP is functioning normally.

“Ping check to *******.******* failed.” TCP/IP is not functioning.

Consult network administrator of the hospital network.

“Echo check to *******.******* succeeded.” DICOM functions are being maintained.

“Echo check to *******.******* failed.” DICOM functions are not being maintained.
Consult network administrator of the hospital network.

266 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 System Presets

Checking the TCP/IP or C-ECHO for Storage Commitment

Preliminary check Enter all the network settings (4 items) for the target server.

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select the MPPS/Commitment tab from the “DICOM” under “SystemPreset”.

3 Switch the radio button for the target server On.

4 Select [Ping] within the Storage Commitment area to check TCP/IP function, and [C-ECHO]
within the Storage Commitment area to confirm the retention of DICOM handling functions.
 Starts instrument examination.

Examination Results The following message is displayed when the test is complete.

Message Status

“Ping check to *******.******* succeeded.” TCP/IP is functioning normally.

“Ping check to *******.******* failed.” TCP/IP is not functioning.

Consult network administrator of the hospital network.

“Echo check to *******.******* succeeded.” DICOM functions are being maintained.

“Echo check to *******.******* failed.” DICOM functions are not being maintained.
Consult network administrator of the hospital network.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 267
System Presets

SR tab

Set items related to DICOM SR .

Parameter Option Description
SR Auto Creation “On”, “Off” Configure the auto creation timing for DICOM SR files when pressing
the [New Patient] key or [End Exam.] key.

Configuring settings for the SR Storage server

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select the SR tab from the “DICOM” under “SystemPreset”.

3 Set SR Auto Creation.

4 Enter information about the SR Storage server.

DICOM SR Storage Settings Categories

Parameter Option Description

AE Title Enter the AE name for the network server in up to 16 characters.
Station Name Sets the computer name of the network server.
IP Address Sets the IP address of the network server.
Port# “0” to “65535” Sets the port No. of the network server.
The DICOM standard setting is“104”.

5 Switch the radio button for the target server On.

268 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 System Presets

Checking the TCP/IP or C-ECHO for SR Storage

Preliminary check Enter all the network settings (4 items) for the target server.

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select the SR tab from the “DICOM” under “SystemPreset”.

3 Switch the radio button for the target server On.

4 Select [Ping] to check TCP/IP function, and [C-ECHO] to confirm the retention of DICOM
handling functions.
 Starts instrument examination.

Examination Results The following message is displayed when the test is complete.

Message Status

“Ping check to *******.******* succeeded.” TCP/IP is functioning normally.

“Ping check to *******.******* failed.” TCP/IP is not functioning.

Consult network administrator of the hospital network.

“Echo check to *******.******* succeeded.” DICOM functions are being maintained.

“Echo check to *******.******* failed.” DICOM functions are not being maintained.
Consult network administrator of the hospital network.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 269
System Presets

Printer tab

Configures the DICOM printer

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select the Printer tab from the “DICOM” under “SystemPreset”.

3 Enter information about the DICOM printer.

DICOM Printer Settings Categories

Parameter Option Description

Model Name Select the printer model from the list.
AE Title Enter the AE name of the DICOM printer in up to 16 characters.
Station Name Sets the computer name of the DICOM printer.
IP Address Sets the IP address of the DICOM printer.
Port# “0” to “65535” Sets the port No. of the DICOM printer.
The DICOM standard setting is “104”.

4 Switch the radio button On for the DICOM printer to use.

Checking the TCP/IP or C-ECHO for the DICOM Printer

Preliminary check Enter all the network settings (4 items) for the target server.

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select the Printer tab from the “DICOM” under “SystemPreset”.

3 Switch the radio button for the target server On.

4 Select [Ping] to check TCP/IP function, and [C-ECHO] to confirm the retention of DICOM
handling functions.
 Starts instrument examination.

Examination Results The following message is displayed when the test is complete.

270 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 System Presets

Message Status

“Ping check to *******.******* successful.” TCP/IP is functioning normally.

“Ping check to *******.******* failed.” TCP/IP is not functioning.

Consult network administrator of the hospital network.

“Echo check to *******.******* successful.” DICOM functions are being maintained.

“Echo check to *******.******* failed.” DICOM functions are not being maintained.
Consult network administrator of the hospital network.

Detail tab

Parameter Option Description

Time Out “1” to “1000” Sets the time (s) until communications timeout.
Retry Interval “1” to “60”, “Power Sets the time before resending.
On” Select the type from either “min” or “hour” after configuring the
numeric values to the right.
DICOM Planar “Plane”, “Pixel” Configures DICOM RGB during network transmission.
Configuration

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 271
Application presets

9-3 Application presets

Configures categories dependent on probes.

1 Press the [Probe/Preset] key.

2 Select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

3 Select “Application”.

Display Example An Application consists of an application list, information, and various buttons.

(1)
(2)
(3)

(4)
(5)

This screen can be used in the following ways:

Parameter Contents
(1) Probe Registration Registering an Application to a Probe
(2) Edit Data Editing Application Parameters
(3) Copy, Paste, Delete Copying, Pasting, and Deleting Applications
(4) Edit Name Changing Application Names
(5) Factory Data Initializing Applications (resetting to factory default settings)

272 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Application presets

9-3-1 Registering an application to a probe

Up to 10 applications can be registered to one probe. Applications that are registered to one probe can
still be registered to another.

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select “Application”.

3 Select target applications from the Application View column.

4 Select [Probe Registration].

5 Select the probe.

6 Select the application.

a Select the registration position.

b Select the application.

Canceling application registrations

Select the target application, then select [Delete].

Select [Delete All] to cancel the registrations of all applications.

7 Select [Exit].

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 273
Application presets

9-3-2 Adding and deleting applications

Adding applications

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select “Application”.

3 Select an application to copy from using the Application View column.

4 Select [Copy].

5 Select the application to overwrite from the Application View field.

To make a new addition, select “[ ]”.

NOTE: Factory default applications, and applications used on the Analysis screen, cannot be overwritten.

6 Select [Paste].
 The selected application will be overwritten.

In the case of a new addition, the copied application is added at the bottom of the Application list.
This application is counted as a user-defined application.

Deleting applications

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select “Application”.

3 Select target applications from the Application View column.

NOTE: Factory default applications, and applications used on the Analysis screen, cannot be deleted.

4 Select [Delete].

5 Confirm the message and select [OK].

 The selected application will be deleted. The application list is updated by moving applications
upwards.

274 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Application presets

9-3-3 Changing application names

Change the name of a newly-added application, etc.

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select “Application”.

3 Select target applications from the Application View column.

NOTE: Factory default applications and “[ ]” cannot be renamed.

4 Enter the name.

a Select [Edit Name] and input a name.

b Press [Enter] key.

9-3-4 Initializing applications

The selected application is restored to factory default status.

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select “Application”.

3 Select target applications from the Application View column.

4 Select [Factory Data].

5 Select [OK] on the message.

 This will reset to the factory default settings. In the user definition Color Map, this will return the
Color Map of the copy source to its factory default settings. However, the name will not be changed.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 275
Application presets

9-3-5 Sorting applications

Move the selected application within the application list.

1 Push the [Preset/Probe] key and select [Probe/Preset] on the touch panel.

2 Select “Application”.

3 Select target applications from the Application View column.

4 Move the application up to the desired position with the trackball while holding down the
[Enter] key.

5 Let go of [Enter] key.

276 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Application presets

9-3-6 Editing application parameters

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select “Application”.

3 Select target applications from the Application View column.

4 Select [Edit Data].

5 Select the target item in the items field.

Application parameters

Item Contents Reference

General Configures parameters not classified below.
B B mode-related settings
M M mode-related settings
Doppler D mode-related settings
Color CF mode-related settings
Tissue Dop. TDI mode-related settings
Body Mark Body mark menu settings
CHI Contrast Harmonic Imaging-related settings CHI Section
Elasto Real-time Tissue Elastography-related settings Elastography Section
RVS Real-time Virtual Sonography-related settings RVS Section
Stress Echo Stress echo-related settings Stress Echo Section
3D/4D 3D/4D-related settings 3D Section
Eyeball EF Eyeball EF-related settings

6 Select the tab.

7 Edit the parameters.

Initializing Display tab parameters
Select [Initialize]. This changes only the parameters in the Display tab to their factory default settings.

8 Select [Save] to save settings.

9 Select [Close] to return to the examination screen.

If the following message is displayed: “Save changes to preset data?”
Select [Yes] to store changes.

Select [No] to close preset screen without saving changes.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 277
Application presets

9-3-7 Application parameter: General

Common tab

Auto Optimizer

Parameter Option Description

Brightness Level “Auto”, “Manual” Sets the automatic or manual acquisition of brightness target values.
Brightness Level “40” to “80” When the Brightness Level is set to “Manual”, this configures the
(Manual) brightness target value.
Base Line Position “1” to “17”, When [Auto Optimizer] is On, this sets the position to shift the
“Unchanged” baseline when compensating baseline shift in D mode.

Target
Parameter Option Description
Gain (B [M]) “On”, “Off” Sets whether or not to use B(M) gain compensation, including TGC
and LGC.
Gain (D) “On”, “Off” Sets whether or not to use Doppler gain compensation.
Sound Speed “On”, “Off” Sets whether or not to use speed of sound compensation.
Dop Vel./Baseline “On”, “Off” Sets whether or not to use Doppler speed range and Doppler
baseline shift compensation.
Gain (Color) “On”, “Off” Sets whether or not to use color gain compensation.
Dop Angle (Real) “On”, “Off” Sets whether or not to use Doppler detection angle (real time)
compensation.
Dop Angle (Freeze) “On”, “Off” Sets whether or not to use Doppler detection angle (freeze)
compensation.

Parameter Option Description

Region Data Setting “Abdomen”, Sets diagnostic region settings associated with applications.
“Obstetric”,
“Gynecology”,
“Cardiology”,
“Vascular”,
“Small Parts”,
“Urology”,
“Transvaginal”,
“Transrectal”,
“Operation”,
“3D”,
“User 1” to “User 9”

278 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Application presets

Parameter Option Description

Input Device “Abdomen”, Sets input devices associated with applications.
“Obstetric”,
“Gynecology”,
“Cardiology”,
“Vascular”,
“Small Parts”,
“Urology”,
“3D”,
“CHI”,
“CHI-HiMI”,
“CHI-Linear”,
“CHI-EUS”,
“User 1” to “User 9”
Measurement Sets measurements associated with applications.
NOTE: Choices differ depending on the application selected in
Application View.
Color Map “Abdomen”, Sets the color map regions applied to this application.
“Obstetric”,
“Gynecology”,
“Cardiology”,
“Vascular”,
“Small Parts”,
“Urology”,
“User 1” to “User 9”
Dual Display Format “L/R”, “U/D” Displays images on the right and left screens or top and bottom
screens in dual screen mode.

Counter
Parameter Option Description
Counter (A) Offset “-59” to “0” Configures the counter to start from -59 seconds.
Counter (B) Offset “-59” to “0” Configures the counter to start from -59 seconds.

General tab

Physiology

Parameter Option Description

Sweep Speed (B) “40.0”, “50.0”, Configures the Sweep Speed (mm/s) of vital signals on single screen
“66.7”, “100.0”, in B mode.
“133.3”, “200.0”,
“300.0”

Parameter Option Description

ECG Display Select “ECG”, Configures the ECG signals to display on the monitor.
“ECG DC IN”

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 279
Application presets

9-3-8 Application parameter: B

Common tab

Parameter Option Description

Vertical Shift “-200” to “100” Sets the display position (in the vertical direction) for B mode images
in the display range, in 1mm units.
LGC Type “Linear”, “V1”, Sets the type of gain compensation to apply to an electronic sector
“V2”, “V3” probe in the lateral direction.
Standoff “On”, “Off” Sets to move the initial focus position one step deeper when using a
coupler with an electronic linear probe.
F. R. Acceleration “On”, “Off” Turn On this function when Line Density is selected to reduce the
number of scanning lines to improve the frame rate.
NOTE:
Refer to the separate “Instruction for use” for information on
compatible probes.

HI Zoom

Parameter Option Description

Area Width (HI “25” to “100” Sets the ROI width when HI Zoom starts, in 5% steps.
Zoom)
Area Height (HI “25” to “100” Sets the ROI height when HI Zoom starts, in 5% steps.
Zoom)
Area Depth (HI “1 (Shallow)” Sets the ROI depth when HI Zoom starts.
Zoom) “2 (Center)”
“3 (Deep)”
Keeping HI Zoom “On”, “Off” Sets to enlarge the displayed image while retaining Color ROI size
Size when Color ON prior to HI ZOOM selection when HI ZOOM is selected before color.
Sets to enlarge the displayed image while retaining ZOOM ROI size
prior to HI ZOOM selection when color is selected before HI ZOOM.

DSD

Parameter Option Description

DSD Speed “1/2”, “1/3”, Sets the playback speed of slow-motion images when activating
“1/4”, “1/10” D.S.D mode.
DSD Refresh Timing “1” to “10” Configures the time up to the slow motion image refresh when
[s] activating D.S.D mode using DSD (time) to one second units.

280 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Application presets

Puncture tab

Parameter Option Description

Puncture Guide Line “On”, “Off” Sets the puncture guideline display setting on application startup.
Puncture Guide Line “White”, “green” Sets the puncture guideline display color.
Color
Puncture Angle “1” to “8” Changes the puncture angle or the distance from ultrasonic
Select irradiation area to the puncture guide line or the active guide line.
NOTE: The settings vary with the probe.
Needle Emphasis “On”, “Off” A setting that improves the visibility of the puncture needle echo.
Angle Select (NE) “-30” to “30” Sets the Graphic Line 2 angle in 5° units when [Needle Emphasis] is
On.
NOTE: The maximum angle value varies depending on the probe.
Puncture Link (NE) “On”, “Off” When [Needle Emphasis] is On, sets Graphic Line 1 to be displayed as
perpendicular to the puncture guide line as possible.
Puncture Display “Single”, “Multi” Sets the puncture guideline display pattern.
Pattern

Range tab

Parameter Option Description

7.5 mm to 400 mm Sets the range to use.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 281
Application presets

9-3-9 Application Parameters: M

Common tab

Parameter Option Description

FAM Cursor Number “2”, “3”, Sets the number of FAM cursors when started in FAM mode.
MAG (FAM) “×0.5”, “×0.75”, Sets the scale for depth display in the FAM mode compared to the B
“×1.00”, “×1.50” mode image, when started in FAM mode.
, “×2.00”
PSAX “On”, “Off” Sets whether or not to join the FAM cursors at their midpoints at a
uniform angle when started in FAM mode.
Trace Fit “On”, “Off” Sets whether or not to match the FAM cursor length to the diagnostic
distance of the B mode image when started in FAM mode.
Scan Area (FAM) “25” to “100”, “Auto” Sets the B mode image scan area when started in FAM mode.
Sweep Speed (M) “40.0”, “50.0”, Sets the sweep speed (mm/s) when started in M mode or FAM mode.
“66.7”, “100.0”,
“133.3”, “200.0”,
“300.0”

282 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Application presets

9-3-10 Application Parameters: Doppler

Common tab

Parameter Option Description

Sweep Speed (Single “40.0”, “50.0”, “66.7”, Sets the sweep speed (mm/s) when started in D mode.
D) “100.0”, “133.3”,
“200.0”, “300.0”
Sweep Speed (Dual “40.0”, “50.0”, Sets the sweep speed (mm/s) when two direction Doppler is started.
D) “66.7”, “100.0”,
“133.3”, “200.0”,
“300.0”
Beam Steer (D) “-30” to “30” Sets the steering angle of the ultrasound beam in an electronic linear
probe, in 5° units.
NOTE: The steering angle range varies depending on the probe.
Steering Link “On”, “Off” Sets the linkage between [Invert Spectrum] and [Invert Color Map].
Invert Spectrum “On”, “Off” Sets the inversion display of the Doppler image when started in D
mode.
High Pulse Repetition “On”, “Off” Sets whether or not High Pulse Repetition Frequency is running
Frequency when the flow velocity range has been raised.
Triplex Frame Rate “Low” Sets the frame rate when started in B/CF/D mode.
“Medium”
“High”
D2 is assigned TDI “On”, “Off” Sets the D2 cursor to TDI when started in two direction Doppler
mode.
Angle Correct “0” to “80” Sets a threshold value for inverted display of angle correction values.
Threshold
Angle Correction “-80” to “80” Sets the angle correction value when started in D mode.
Angle Correct Value “On”, “Off” Sets the angle correction value display when Dop cursor is displayed.
Display

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 283
Application presets

Auto Trace tab

Parameter Option Description

Measurement “Auto” Configures menu for transferring measurement memory during the
Transfer List freeze mode to be displayed.
“Manual” Configures menu for transferring measurement memory during the
freeze mode to not be displayed.
Doppler Auto Trace “On”, “Off” Sets automatic trace activation when displaying D mode.
Trace Smooth “Low”, “High” Sets the smoothness level of the trace line.
Trace Direction “Toward” Sets the traced region for Doppler Auto Trace to above the baseline.
“Away” Sets the traced region for Doppler Auto Trace to below the baseline.
“Both” Sets the traced region for Doppler Auto Trace to both above and
below the baseline.
“Auto” Sets the traced region for Doppler Auto Trace to switch automatically.
If the baseline is the center of the image, or below the center, the area
above the baseline is targeted.
If the baseline is above the center of the image, the area below the
baseline is targeted.
Trace Threshold “-22” to “0” Sets the trace domain to the Doppler signal.
Freeze Trigger “On”, “Off” Configures a trace line to be displayed upon freeze.

Display Item
Parameter Option Description
PI “On”, “Off” Sets the display for the measurement item PI of the Auto Doppler
trace.
RI “On”, “Off” Sets the display for the measurement item RI of the Auto Doppler
trace.
S/D “On”, “Off” Sets the display for the measurement item S/D of the Auto Doppler
trace.
D/S “On”, “Off” Sets the display for the measurement item D/S of the Auto Doppler
trace.
PSV “On”, “Off” Sets the display for the measurement item PSV of the Auto Doppler
trace.
EDV “On”, “Off” Sets the display for the measurement item EDV of the Auto Doppler
trace.
MnV “On”, “Off” Sets the display for the measurement item MnV of the Auto Doppler
trace.
FlowT “On”, “Off” Sets the display for the measurement item FlowT of the Auto Doppler
trace.
HR “On”, “Off” Sets the display for the measurement item HR of the Auto Doppler
trace.

284 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Application presets

9-3-11 Application parameter: Color

Common tab

Parameter Option Description

Accumulation Time “0.25”, “0.5”, Sets the retention time for [Accumu. Imaging]. The color flow display
“0.75”, “1”, “2”, is updated at the specified time.
“3”, “4”, “8”, The color flow display is not updated if the setting is “Continuous”.
“Continuous”
Vector Scan (Color, “On”, “Off” Sets the scan method to vector scan when Trapezoidal Scanning
PW) starts in CF, PD, or eFlow mode.
Focus Control (Color) “Auto” A setting that automatically adjusts the focus position in color flow
mode.
“Manual” A setting that enables manual adjustment of focus position in color
flow mode.
Dual CF Offset Gain “-30” to “30” Sets the gain compensation value to apply to B mode gain when
Dual CF starts in B+CF mode.
Beam Steer (Color) “-30” to “30” Sets the steering angle of the ultrasound beam in an electronic linear
probe, in 5° units.
NOTE: The steering angle range varies depending on the probe.
Sensitivity Priority “On”, “Off” Sets the condition for projection repeat frequency (PRF) when
starting in CF mode to detection sensitivity priority.
Higher density “On”, “Off” In CF mode, PD mode and eFlow mode, the scan line density (B) is
(Color) reduced while scan line density (CF, PD and eFlow) is increased.

Power Doppler

Parameter Option Description

Directional “On”, “Off” Sets the Directional display when started in PD mode.
Sensitivity Priority “On”, “Off” Sets the condition for projection repeat frequency (PRF) when
starting in PD mode to detection sensitivity priority.

eFlow

Parameter Option Description

Directional “On”, “Off” Sets the Directional display when started in eFlow mode.
Sensitivity Priority “On”, “Off” Sets the condition for projection repeat frequency (PRF) when
starting in eFlow mode to detection sensitivity priority.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 285
Application presets

9-3-12 Application Parameters: Tissue Dop.

PW tab

Parameter Option Description

Invert Spectrum “On”, “Off” Sets the inversion display of the Doppler image when started in TDI
mode.

286 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Application presets

9-3-13 Application Parameters: Body Mark

Edit the Body Mark Menu for the Body Mark item.

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select “Application”.

3 Select target applications from the Application View column.

4 Select [Edit Data].

5 Select “Body Mark” from the Item Position field.

6 Set Body Mark Changed by Trackball.

Setting the default body marks to display

Turn On the radio button of the target body mark.

Deleting (making the field blank)

a Select the body mark to be deleted.

b Select [Delete].

Replacing the Menu

a Select the body mark to be replaced.

b Select [Edit].

c Select the body mark classification in Master

Data.

d Select the body mark concerned.

Use the <<>> at the lower right of the page.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 287
Application presets

Setting probe marks

a Select the body mark concerned.

b Select [Edit].

c Select the probe mark.

d Select [Position].

e Use the trackball to set the probe mark

position, and turn the [Pointer] key to set the
probe mark angle.
Setting the left/right display

a Select the body mark concerned.

b Select [Edit].

c Set left/right display (L or R display) under

L/R Display.

Applying all body marks which can be used with L/R display
Put a check in ALL MARK.

Remove the check mark to make settings for each body mark.

7 Select [Exit].
Resetting to Default
Select [Cancel].

8 Repeat steps 5 for the body marks to be changed.

9 Select [Save].

288 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Application presets

9-3-14 Application Parameters: EyeballEF

Display Setting tab

Parameter Option Description

Transparency “0” to “100” Sets the permeability of ROIs.
Color Sets the color transparency of ROIs.

ROI

Parameter Option Description

Display Long Axis “On”, “Off” Configures the long axis display on US images.
Display of Freeze OFF “On”, “Off” Sets analysis result display of ultrasonic image during freeze OFF.

Analysis Result

Parameter Option Description

Display of Freeze OFF “On”, “Off” Sets analysis result display of ultrasonic image during freeze OFF
within the analysis results frame.
Volume “On”, “Off” Sets the Volume display within the analysis results frame.
Stroke Volume “On”, “Off” Sets the Stroke Volume display within the analysis results frame.
Ejection Fraction “On”, “Off” Sets the Ejection Fraction display within the analysis results frame.
%dif “On”, “Off” Sets the %difD and %difS display.

Graph

Parameter Option Description

The Maximum of The “On”, “Off” Sets the maximum value of the vertical axis to the value below.
Spindle is set.
“0” to “200” Configures the display scale of the maximum value (ml) of the
graph's vertical axis.

Analysis Setting tab

Analysis Setting

Parameter Option Description

Auto “On”, “Off” Sets the region analysis methods automatically.
A4C “On”, “Off” Sets the region analysis methods to A4C.
A4C->A2C “On”, “Off” Sets the region analysis method to A4C and then A2C.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 289
Application presets

Time From End-Diastole

Parameter Option Description

Time from “On”, “Off” Sets the end-systole to the time phase of the values set below from
End-diastole the end-diastole.
“150” to “400” Sets the time (ms) from the end-diastole.
Calculation from “On”, “Off” Sets the end-systole to the method used to calculate from capacity.
Volume

Function Setting tab

Systole Edit

Parameter Option Description

Set three points. “On”, “Off” Sets the Systole compilation method to Three points Set.
Correct the tracking “On”, “Off” Sets the Systole compilation method to The tracking is corrected.
results.

290 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 QSS Presets

9-4 QSS Presets

QSS (Quick Scanning Selector) is a preset to make batch changes to settings corresponding to the body
shape or organs of the test subject. The QSS preset can be changed without changing the application.

Example of QSS preset settings

QSS presets group together parameters related to image quality (gain, dynamic range, etc.) for each
corresponding mode. The corresponding modes are classified as follows:
Classification of QSS Presets by Corresponding Mode
Item Description Reference
General Configures parameters not classified below.
B B mode-related settings
M M mode-related settings
Color CF mode-related settings
Doppler D mode-related settings
Tissue Dop. TDI mode-related settings
CHI Contrast Harmonic Imaging-related settings CHI Section
3D/4D 3D/4D-related settings 3D Section
Physiology Settings related to physiological signals

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 291
QSS Presets

9-4-1 Editing QSS presets

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select “Application”.

3 Select the target application from the Application View field.

4 Select [Edit Data].

5 Select [QSS] to edit the presets.

Configuring the QSS preset that is used first after a change of application
Select the relevant button under Default QSS (see diagram below (2)).

Changing Names
Under QSS Name (see diagram below (1)), enter up to 16 characters, using the keyboard, as the name of
the QSS preset.

Change parameters

a Select a category.
(1) (2)
b Select a tab.

c Change parameters.
Changing the Fix column

When parameters are changed in the Fix column

(3)
(see diagram below (4)), the settings are applied
to presets A - D.
(4)
If any one of the columns A - D is changed, the Fix
column is displayed blank.

d Repeat steps a - c for the parameters

concerned.
Items that have been changed from their default
values are highlighted.

Returning to the factory default presets

Select [Initialize] (see diagram below ((3)) in the relevant QSS preset column.

The applicable QSS presets will be restored to their factory defaults.

292 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 QSS Presets

Copying QSS presets

a Select [Preset Copy]. c d b

b Select an application as the copy destination
or source.

c Set the QSS presets as the copy source and

copy destination.

d If the copy to is on the left, select [Preset

Copy <<] and, if it is on the right, select
[Preset Copy >>].
g
e Enter the name in the dialog box.
Copying QSS presets
f Select [OK].

g Select [Close].

Step e Dialog Box

6 Select [Close].

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 293
QSS Presets

9-4-2 QSS parameters: General

Acoustic Power tab

Parameter Option Description

Acoustic Power (B) “5” to “100” Sets the acoustic power on starting in B mode or M mode, in 5%
units.
Acoustic Power “5” to “100” Sets the acoustic power on starting in Color Flow mode or PW mode,
(Color/PW) in 5% units.
Acoustic Power (CW) “High” Sets the acoustic power on starting in CW mode.
“Middle”
“Low”

Focus tab

Parameter Option Description

Focus Position “F16” to “F1”, Sets the focus position in the B mode image.
“Auto”
Focus Step “1” to “4” Sets the number of focus steps in the B mode image.
Focus Width “2” to “15” Sets the focus combination in the B mode image.

Area tab

Parameter Option Description

Scan Area (B) “25” to “100” Sets the scan area for B mode images in 5% increments.
Scan Area (B-Color) “25” to “100” Sets the B mode scan area for B (Color) mode images in 5%
increments.
Scan Area (B-Color/*) “25” to “100” Sets the B mode scan area for B (Color)/* mode in 5% increments.

294 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 QSS Presets

BiPlane tab

Parameter Option Description

Focus Position (L) “F16” to “F1”, Sets the focus position in the vertical section B mode image when
“Auto” there is a 1-connector biplane connection.
Focus Position (T) “F16” to “F1”, Sets the focus position in the lateral section B mode image when
“Auto” there is a 1-connector biplane connection.
Focus Step (L) “1” to “4” Sets the number of focus steps in the vertical section B mode image
when there is a 1-connector biplane connection.
Focus Step (T) “1” to “4” Sets the number of focus steps in the lateral section B mode image
when there is a 1-connector biplane connection.
Focus Width (L) “2” to “15” Sets the focus combination in the vertical section B mode image
when there is a 1-connector biplane connection.
Focus Width (T) “2” to “15” Sets the focus combination in the lateral section B mode image when
there is a 1-connector biplane connection.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 295
QSS Presets

9-4-3 QSS parameters: B

B1 tab

Parameter Option Description

Initial Range “7.5” to “400” Sets the display range for B mode images on application startup.
Tx Mode “Fundamental” Sets observation mode on application startup.
“Tissue Harmonic”
“Coded Imaging”
Tx Frequency “5 (High)”, “4”, Sets Transmit (for fundamental) when the application starts.
(Fundamental) “3 (Middle)”, “2 ”,
“1 (Low)”
R-Filter “Penetration”, Set R-Filter (Fundamental) for when the application starts.
(Fundamental) “Standard”,
“Resolution”,
“Fine”
Tissue Harmonic “FmT”, Sets the method to use when the Tx Mode is “Tissue Harmonic” on
Mode “WbT”, application startup.
“HdT”
Tx Frequency (Tissue “2 (High)”, “1 (Low)” Sets Transmit (for tissue harmonics) for when the application starts.
Harmonic)
R-Filter (Tissue “Penetration”, Sets R-Filter (Tissue Harmonic) for when the application starts.
Harmonic) “Standard”,
“Resolution”,
“Fine”
Tx Frequency (Coded “2 (High)”, Sets Transmit (for coded imaging) for when the application starts.
Imaging) “1 (Low)”

R-Filter (Coded “Penetration”, Set R-Filter (Coded Imaging) for when the application starts.
Imaging “Standard”,
“Resolution”,
“Fine”
Low Echo Reduction “0” to “70” Sets the low brightness compensation for B mode images at
(B) application startup.
A “0” setting will not apply any low brightness compensation.

296 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 QSS Presets

B2 tab

Parameter Option Description

Gain “0” to “80” Sets the B gain at which the application starts, in units of 1dB.
Dynamic Range (B) “40” to “90” Sets Dynamic Range (B) to use on application startup.
Line Density (B) “1” to “4” Sets Line Density (B) to use on application startup.
Scanning accuracy increases when the level goes up and decreases
when the level goes down.
Line Density [HI “1” to “4” Configures the Line Density (B) used when HI Zoom starts.
Zoom] (B) Line density increases when the level goes up and decreases when
the level goes down.
PRF (B/M) “High”, “Mid”, “Low” Changes the pulse repetition on frequency. The upper limit on pulse
repetition on frequency is raised to “L”, “M”, “H”, in order.
Persistence (B) “0” to “7” Configures the level of correlation processing to apply between
image frames on application startup. A “0” setting will not apply any
correlation processing.
Persistence “0” to “7” Configures the level of correlation processing between the image
[Compound] (B) frames at compound start-up. A “0” setting will not apply any
correlation processing.
AGC (B) “0” to “3” Sets AGC(B) to use on application startup.
Sound Speed “1400” to “1650” Set the speed of sound adjustment level corresponding to the
receive focus delay time.
Set to “1540” for the regulation speed of sound.
Graymap “1” to “10” Sets the graymap which is applied to B mode images when the
application starts.
Color Map “A” to “O” Sets the color map which is applied to B mode images when the
application starts.

B3 tab

Parameter Option Description

Compound “On”, “Off” Sets the compound startup to use on application startup.
Compound # “2”, “1” Sets the number of Compound addition layers to use on application
startup.
Steer (Compound) “Negative direction” Sets the Compound transmission direction to use on application
“Off” startup.
“Positive direction”
Angle (Compound) “5” to “30” Sets the Compound steering angle, in 5° units.
NOTE: The maximum steering angle range varies depending on the
probe.
Trapezoidal Scanning “On”, “Off” Sets Trapezoidal Scan activation.
Beam Steer (B) “-30” to “30” Sets the steering angle of the ultrasound beam in an electronic linear
probe, when an application starts, in 5° units.
NOTE: The steering angle range varies depending on the probe.
HI REZ “On”, “Off” Sets the use of HI REZ on application startup.
Enhancement Level “1” to “4” Sets the enhancement level to use on application startup.
(B)
HI REZ Level “1” to “8” Changes the level of the HI REZ image filter.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 297
QSS Presets

Parameter Option Description

Echo Enhancement “0” to “7” Applies image filtering for the gap-filling process in the scan direction
(B) to create an image from a weak signal at application startup. A “0”
setting will not apply any filtering.
Texture “Smooth”, “Sharp” Displays smoother image surfaces.

Post Process tab

Parameter Option Description

Gamma Type (B) “Window Type”, Sets the γ type which is applied when the application starts.
“S-Curve Type”,
“Parabolic Type”,
“Linear Type”
Gamma (B) “-4.0” to “4.0” Sets the gamma value at which the application starts, in units of 0.1.
Rejection (B) “0” to “255” Configures the location of the rise of the curve.
Center (B) “0” to “255” Configures the location of the center for s-curve type curves.
Saturation (B) “0” to “255” Configures the saturation location of curves.

Biplane 1 tab

Parameter Option Description

Gain (B) [T] “0” to “80” Sets the B gain for a lateral section in biplane at which the application
starts, in 1dB units.
Gain (B) [L] “0” to “80” Sets the B gain for a vertical section, in 1-connector biplane, at which
the application starts, in 1dB units.
Scan Area (B) [T] “25” to “100” Sets the scan area in the lateral section B mode image, in 5% units, in
1-connector biplane.
Scan Area (B) [L] “25” to “100” Sets the scan area in the vertical section B mode image, in 5% units, in
1-connector biplane.
Initial Range [T] “7.5” to “400” Sets the display range for B mode lateral section images on
application startup with a 1-connector biplane connection.
Initial Range [L] “7.5” to “400” Sets the display range for B mode vertical section images on
application startup with a 1-connector biplane connection.
Tx Mode [T] “Fundamental” Sets the observation mode for a lateral section image on application
“Tissue Harmonic” startup with a 1-connector biplane connection.
“Coded Imaging”
Tx Mode [L] “Fundamental” Sets the observation mode for a vertical section image on application
“Tissue Harmonic” startup with a 1-connector biplane connection.
“Coded Imaging”
Tx Frequency “5 (High)”, “4”, Sets Transmit (for fundamental) in a lateral section in 1-connector
(Fundamental) [T] “3 (Middle)”, “2 ”, biplane when the application starts.
“1 (Low)”
Tx Frequency “5 (High)”, “4”, Sets Transmit (for fundamental) in a vertical section in 1-connector
(Fundamental) [L] “3 (Middle)”, “2 ”, biplane when the application starts.
“1 (Low)”

298 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 QSS Presets

Parameter Option Description

R-Filter “Penetration”, Sets R-Filter (Fundamental) in a lateral section in 1-connector biplane
(Fundamental) [T] “Standard”, when the application starts.
“Resolution”,
“Fine”
R-Filter “Penetration”, Sets R-Filter (Fundamental) in a vertical section in 1-connector
(Fundamental) [L] “Standard”, biplane when the application starts.
“Resolution”,
“Fine”

Biplane 2 tab

Parameter Option Description

Tx Frequency (Tissue “2 (High)”, Sets the Transmit (tissue harmonics) to use on application startup, for
Harmonic) [T] “1 (Low)” a lateral section in 1-connector biplane.
Tx Frequency (Tissue “2 (High)”, Sets the Transmit (tissue harmonics) to use on application startup, for
Harmonic) [L] “1 (Low)” a vertical section in 1-connector biplane.
R-Filter (Tissue “Penetration”, Sets the R-Filter (Tissue Harmonic) to use on application startup, for a
Harmonic) [T] “Standard”, lateral section in 1-connector biplane.
“Resolution”,
“Fine”
R-Filter (Tissue “Penetration”, Sets the R-Filter (Tissue Harmonic) to use on application startup, for a
Harmonic) [L] “Standard”, vertical section in 1-connector biplane.
“Resolution”,
“Fine”
Tx Frequency (Coded “2 (High)”, Sets the Transmit (coded imaging) to use on application startup, for a
Imaging) [T] “1 (Low)” lateral section in 1-connector biplane.
Tx Frequency (Coded “2 (High)”, Sets the Transmit (coded imaging) to use on application startup, for a
Imaging) [L] “1 (Low)” vertical section in 1-connector biplane.
R-Filter (Coded “Penetration”, Sets the R-Filter (Coded Imaging) to use on application startup, for a
Imaging) [T] “Standard”, lateral section in 1-connector biplane.
“Resolution”,
“Fine”
R-Filter (Coded “Penetration”, Sets the R-Filter (Coded Imaging) to use on application startup, for a
Imaging) [L] “Standard”, vertical section in 1-connector biplane.
“Resolution”,
“Fine”
Tissue Harmonic “FmT”, Sets the method to use when the Tx Mode is “Tissue Harmonic” on
Mode [T] “WbT”, application startup, for a lateral section in 1-connector biplane.
“HdT”,
Tissue Harmonic “FmT”, Sets the method to use when the Tx Mode is “Tissue Harmonics” on
Mode [L] “WbT”, application startup, for a vertical section in 1-connector biplane.
“HdT”,

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 299
QSS Presets

9-4-4 QSS parameters: M

Post Process tab

Parameter Option Description

Gamma Type (M) “Window Type”, Sets the γ type which is applied when the application starts.
“S-Curve Type”,
“Parabolic Type”,
“Linear Type”
Gamma (M) “-4.0” to “4.0” Sets the gamma value at which the application starts, in units of 0.1.
Rejection (M) “0” to “255” Configures the location of the rise of the curve.
Center (M) “0” to “255” Configures the location of the center for s-curve type curves.
Saturation (M) “0” to “255” Configures the saturation location of curves.
Gamma Type (FAM) “Window Type”, Sets the γ type which is applied when the application starts.
“S-Curve Type”,
“Parabolic Type”,
“Linear Type”
Gamma (FAM) “-4.0” to “4.0” Sets the gamma value at which the application starts, in units of 0.1.
Rejection (FAM) “0” to “255” Configures the location of the rise of the curve.
Center (FAM) “0” to “255” Configures the location of the center for s-curve type curves.
Saturation (FAM) “0” to “255” Configures the saturation location of curves.

M tab

Parameter Option Description

M Offset Gain “-30” to “30” Set the offset value applied to the B gain with which the application
starts, in units of 1dB.
Dynamic Range (M) “40” to “90” Sets Dynamic Range (M) to use on application startup.
Enhancement Level “1” to “4” Sets the enhancement level to use on application startup.
(M)
Graymap “1” to “8” Sets the graymap which is applied to M mode images when the
application starts.
AGC (M) “0” to “3” Sets AGC(M) to use on application startup.
Echo Enhancement “0” to “7” Applies image filtering for the gap-filling process in the scan direction
(M) to create an image from a weak signal at application startup. A “0”
setting will not apply any filtering.
Color Map “A” to “O” Sets the color map which is applied to M mode when the application
starts.

300 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 QSS Presets

FAM tab

Parameter Option Description

Dynamic Range “40” to “90” Sets Dynamic Range (M) to use on application startup.
(FAM)
Graymap “1” to “8” Sets the graymap which is applied to M mode images when the
application starts.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 301
QSS Presets

9-4-5 QSS parameters: Color

Common tab

Parameter Option Description

Area Width (Flow) “10” to “100” Set the flow area width on application startup, in units of 5%.
NOTE: The configurable range varies depending on the probe.
Area Width (Flow/*) “10” to “100” Sets flow area width during Flow/*mode at 5% units.
NOTE: The configurable range varies depending on the probe.
Area Height (Flow) “25” to “100” Set the flow area height at which the application starts, in units of 5%.
Area Depth (Flow) “1 (Shallow)” Set the flow area depth at which the application starts, in units of 5%.
“2 (Center)”
“3 (Deep)”
TGC Enhancement “Off” Sets the Color Flow Gain optimization in depth direction that will be
“On” used at application startup.
NOTE: TGC Enhancement is not available with some probes. For
details, refer to the “Instruction for use” volume.

Color Flow 1 tab

Parameter Option Description

Ref. Frequency (Color “3 (High)” Sets the reference frequency (Transmit) for CF mode on application
Flow) “2 (Middle)” startup.
“1 (Low)”
Gain (Color Flow) “0” to “255” Sets Color Flow Gain to use on application startup.
Line Density (Color “1” to “8” Sets Line Density (CF) to use on application startup.
Flow) Scanning accuracy increases when the level goes up and decreases
when the level goes down.
Line Density [HI “1” - “8” Set the Line Density to apply when HI Zoom (Color Flow Mode) starts.
Zoom] (Color Flow)
Velocity Range (CF) “401.04” to “0.63” Sets the velocity range for CF mode on application startup.
NOTE: The speed range scope differs depending on probe.
Persistence “0” to “7” Configures the level of correlation processing to apply between
image frames on application startup. A “0” setting will not apply any
correlation processing.
Wall Filter “1” to “6” Sets the level of unnecessary signals caused by wall movement that
will be removed to show only the blood flow signal.
Raising the level raises the frequency removed.
Packet Size “Large” Lowers the frame rate but displays the color flow with a high level of
precision.
“Middle” Displays the default color flow.
“Small” This setting displays color flow with good real time performance.
The frame rate will increase but the precision will drop slightly.
Wall Motion “Off” Sets the level of clutter signals (wall motion noise) reduction.
Reduction “Low”
“Middle”
“High”

302 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 QSS Presets

Parameter Option Description

Smoothing “1” to “5” Sets the level that smoothly displays color flow.
Variance Enhance “1” to “8” Sets the level for color flow dispersion display.

Color Flow 2 tab

Parameter Option Description

Color Map “A” to “O” Sets the color map which is applied to Color Flow mode when the
application starts.
Display Priority: BW “0” to “16” Sets the monochrome brightness threshold value for parts of the B
Threshold mode image that are deemed to be tissue and have color flow
removed.
Display Priority: BW “1” to “10” Sets the monochrome brightness correction coefficient for parts of
Coefficient the B mode image that are deemed to be tissue and have color flow
removed.

Power Doppler 1 tab

Parameter Option Description

Ref. Frequency “3 (High)” Sets the reference frequency (Transmit) for PD mode on application
(Power Doppler) “2 (Middle)” startup.
“1 (Low)”
Gain (Power Doppler) “0” to “255” Sets Power Doppler Gain to use on application startup.
Line Density (Power “1” to “8” Sets Line Density (PD) to use on application startup.
Doppler) Scanning accuracy increases when level is raised and decreases when
it is lowered.
Line Density [HI “1” to “8” Set the Line Density to apply when HI Zoom (Power Doppler Mode)
Zoom] (Power starts.
Doppler)
Velocity Range (PD) “401.04” to “0.63” Sets the velocity range for PD mode on application startup.
NOTE: The velocity range varies depending on the probe.
Persistence “0” to “7” Configures the level of correlation processing to apply between
image frames on application startup. A “0” setting will not apply any
correlation processing.
Wall Filter “1” to “6” Sets a level that removes unnecessary signals from wall movement, in
order to display only blood flow signal.
Raising the level raises the frequency removed.
Packet Size “Large” Lowers the frame rate but displays the color flow with a high level of
precision.
“Middle” Displays the default color flow.
“Small” Display good real-time color flow.
The frame rate will increase but the precision will drop slightly.
Wall Motion “Off” Sets the level of clutter signals (wall motion noise) reduction.
Reduction “Low”
“Middle”
“High”
Smoothing “1” to “5” Sets the level that smoothly displays color flow.
Dynamic Range “1” to “8” Sets Dynamic Range (PD) to use on application startup.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 303
QSS Presets

Power Doppler 2 tab

Parameter Option Description

Color Map (PD) “A” to “O” Sets the color map which is applied to PD mode when the
application starts.
Display Priority: BW “0” to “16” Sets the display priority level of color and B image.
Threshold
Display Priority: BW “1” to “10” Sets coefficients in order to fine-tune display priority level.
Coefficient
Color Map (Dir.-PD) “A” to “O” Sets the Color Map which is applied to Direction + PD mode when
the application starts.

eFlow 1 tab

Parameter Option Description

Ref. Frequency “3 (High)” Sets the reference frequency (Transmit) for eFlow mode on
(eFlow) “2 (Middle)” application startup.
“1 (Low)”
Gain (eFlow) “0” to “255” Sets eFlow Gain to use on application startup.
Line Density (eFlow) “1” to “8” Sets Line Density (eFlow) to use on application startup.
Line Density increases when level is raised and decreases when it is
lowered.
Line Density [HI “1” to “8” Set the Line Density to apply when HI Zoom (eFlow Mode) starts.
Zoom] (eFlow)
Velocity Range “401.04” to “0.63” Sets the velocity range for eFlow mode on application startup.
(eFlow) NOTE: The velocity range varies depending on the probe.
Persistence “0” to “7” Configures the level of correlation processing to apply between
image frames on application startup. A “0” setting will not apply any
correlation processing.
Wall Filter “1” to “6” Sets a level that removes unnecessary signals from wall movement, in
order to display only blood flow signal.
Raising the level raises the frequency removed.
Packet Size “Large” Lowers the frame rate but displays the color flow with a high level of
precision.
“Middle” Displays the default color flow.
“Small” This setting displays color flow with good real time performance.
The frame rate will increase but the precision will drop slightly.
Wall Motion “Off” Sets the level of clutter signals (wall motion noise) reduction.
Reduction “Low”
“Middle”
“High”
Smoothing “1” to “5” Sets the level that smoothly displays color flow.
Dynamic Range “1” to “8” Sets Dynamic Range (eFlow) to use on application startup.

304 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 QSS Presets

eFlow 2 tab

Parameter Option Description

Color Map (eFlow) “A” to “O” Sets the color map which is applied to PD mode when the
application starts.
eFlow Display Priority “Preference” Configures the ability to change the monochrome brightness
Method threshold value and coefficient for parts of the B mode image that are
deemed to be tissue and have color flow removed.
“Auto” Configures the ability to change automatically monochrome
brightness threshold value and coefficient for parts of the B mode
image that are deemed to be tissue and have color flow removed.
Display Priority “0” to “16” Sets the monochrome brightness threshold value when eFlow
Preference: BW Display Priority Method is “Preference”.
Threshold
Display Priority “1” to “10” Sets the correction coefficient of monochrome brightness when
Preference: BW eFlow Display Priority Method is “Preference”.
Coefficient
Color Map “A” to “O” Sets the color map which is applied to Directional + eFlow mode
(Dir.-eFlow) when the application starts.

Biplane tab

Parameter Option Description

Gain (Color Flow) [T] “0” to “255” Sets the Color Flow gain for a lateral section, in 1-connector biplane,
at which the application starts.
Gain (Color Flow) [L] “0” to “255” Sets the Color Flow gain for a vertical section, in 1-connector biplane,
at which the application starts.
Gain (Power Doppler) “0” to “255” Sets the Power Doppler gain for a lateral section, in 1-connector
[T] biplane, at which the application starts.
Gain (Power Doppler) “0” to “255” Sets the Power Doppler gain for a vertical section, in 1-connector
[L] biplane, at which the application starts.
Gain (eFlow) [T] “0” to “255” Sets the eFlow gain for a lateral section, in 1-connector biplane, at
which the application starts.
Gain (eFlow) [L] “0” to “255” Sets the eFlow gain for a vertical section, in 1-connector biplane, at
which the application starts.
Ref. Frequency (Color “3 (High)” Sets the reference frequency (Transmit) for a 1-connector biplane
Flow) [T] “2 (Middle)” lateral section in CF mode on application startup.
“1 (Low)”
Ref. Frequency (Color “3 (High)” Sets the reference frequency (Transmit) for a 1-connector biplane
Flow) [L] “2 (Middle)” vertical section in CF mode on application startup.
“1 (Low)”
Ref. Frequency “3 (High)” Sets the reference frequency (Transmit) for a 1-connector biplane
(Power Doppler) [T] “2 (Middle)” lateral section in PD mode on application startup.
“1 (Low)”
Ref. Frequency “3 (High)” Sets the reference frequency (Transmit) for a 1-connector biplane
(Power Doppler) [L] “2 (Middle)” vertical section in PD mode on application startup.
“1 (Low)”
Ref. Frequency “3 (High)” Sets the reference frequency (Transmit) for a 1-connector biplane
(eFlow) [T] “2 (Middle)” lateral section in eFlow mode on application startup.
“1 (Low)”

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 305
QSS Presets

Parameter Option Description

Ref. Frequency “3 (High)” Sets the reference frequency (Transmit) for a 1-connector biplane
(eFlow) [L] “2 (Middle)” vertical section in eFlow mode on application startup.
“1 (Low)”

306 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 QSS Presets

9-4-6 QSS parameters: Doppler

Common tab

Parameter Option Description

Color Map “A” to “O” Sets the color map which is applied to D mode when the application
starts.

PW tab

Parameter Option
Ref. Frequency (PW) “3 (High)” Sets the reference frequency (Transmit) for PW mode on application
“2 (Middle)” startup.
“1 (Low)”
Gain (PW) “0” to “60” Sets D Gain to use on application startup.
Velocity Range (PW) “401.04” to “1.25” Sets the velocity range for PW mode on application startup.
NOTE: The velocity range varies depending on the probe.
Wall Filter (D) “1” to “12” Sets a level that removes unnecessary signals from wall movement, in
order to display only blood flow signal.
Raising the level raises the frequency removed.
Spectrum Resolution “Low” Sets data number to use for frequency analysis during PW wave
(D) “Middle” display.
“High”
Dop. Gamma “1” to “8” Sets the Doppler wave form contrast, and the level of gamma
adjustment, to use on application startup.
Sample Volume “0.5” to “20.0” Sets the sample volume detection width (mm) for the Dop Cursor or
(PW1) D1 Cursor on application startup.
Sample Volume “0.5” to “20.0” Sets the sample volume detection width (mm) for the D2 Cursor on
(PW2) application startup.
Baseline Shift (PW) “-16” to “16” Sets the Doppler baseline position to use on application startup.
Shifts up and down, relative to “0” as the image center position.
Baseline Shift (PW1) “-16” to “16” Sets the Doppler (PW1) baseline (0mm/s) position to use on
application startup.
Baseline Shift (PW2) “-16” to “16” Sets the Doppler (PW2) baseline (0mm/s) position to use on
application startup.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 307
QSS Presets

Post Process tab

Parameter Option Description

Gamma Type (PW) “Window Type”, Sets the γ type which is applied when the application starts.
“S-Curve Type”,
“Parabolic Type”,
“Linear Type”
Gamma (PW) “-4.0” to “4.0” Sets the gamma value at which the application starts, in units of 0.1.
Rejection (PW) “0” to “255” Configures the location of the rise of the curve.
Center (PW) “0” to “255” Configures the location of the center for s-curve type curves.
Saturation (PW) “0” to “255” Configures the saturation location of curves.
Gamma Type (CW) “Window Type”, Sets the γ type which is applied when the application starts.
“S-Curve Type”,
“Parabolic Type”,
“Linear Type”
Gamma (CW) “-4.0” to “4.0” Sets the gamma value at which the application starts, in units of 0.1.
Rejection (CW) “0” to “255” Configures the location of the rise of the curve.
Center (CW) “0” to “255” Configures the location of the center for s-curve type curves.
Saturation (CW) “0” to “255” Configures the saturation location of curves.

CW tab

Parameter Option Description

Gain (CW) “0” to “60” Sets D Gain to use on application startup.
Velocity Range (CW) “802.08” to “24.81” Sets the velocity range (vertical axis direction, cm/s) for CW mode on
application startup.
NOTE: The velocity range varies depending on the probe.
Wall Filter (D) “1” to “12” Sets a level that removes unnecessary signals from wall movement, in
order to display only blood flow signal.
Raising the level raises the frequency removed.
Spectrum Resolution “Low” Sets the amount of data for use in frequency analysis during CW
(D) “Middle” wave form display.
“High”
Dop. Gamma “1” to “8” Sets the Doppler wave form contrast, and the level of gamma
adjustment, to use on application startup.
Raising the level raises the frequency removed.
Baseline Shift (CW) “-16” to “16” Sets the Doppler baseline position to use on application startup.
Adaptive Noise “Off” Sets the CW image noise reduction level to use on application
Rejection “Low” startup.
“High”

308 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 QSS Presets

Biplane tab

Parameter Option Description

Ref. Frequency (PW) “3 (High)” Sets the reference frequency (Transmit) for a 1-connector biplane
[L] “2 (Middle)” vertical section in PW mode on application startup.
“1 (Low)”
Ref. Frequency (PW) “3 (High)” Sets the reference frequency (Transmit) for a 1-connector biplane
[T] “2 (Middle)” lateral section in PW mode on application startup.
“1 (Low)”
Gain (PW) [L] “0” to “60” Sets the D gain for a vertical section, in 1-connector biplane, at which
the application starts.
Gain (PW) [T] “0” to “60” Sets the D gain for a lateral section, in 1-connector biplane, at which
the application starts.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 309
QSS Presets

9-4-7 QSS parameters: Tissue Dop.

PW tab

Parameter Option Description

Gain (TD-PW) “0” to “60” Sets D Gain (TD-PW) to use on application startup.
Velocity Range “401.04” to “1.25” Sets the velocity range for TD-PW mode on application startup.
(TD-PW) NOTE: The velocity range varies depending on the probe.
Wall Filter (TD-PW) “1” to “12” Sets a level that removes unnecessary signals from wall movement, in
order to display only blood flow signal.
Raising the level raises the frequency removed.
Spectrum Resolution “Low” Sets data number to use for frequency analysis during PW wave
(TD-PW) “Middle” display.
“High”
Dop. Gamma “1” to “8” Sets the Doppler wave form contrast, and the level of gamma
adjustment, to use on application startup.
Raising the level raises the frequency removed.
Sample Volume “0.5” to “20.0” Sets the sample volume detection width (mm) for the Dop Cursor or
(TD-PW1) D1 Cursor on application startup.
Sample Volume “0.5” to “20.0” Sets the sample volume detection width (mm) for the D2 Cursor on
(TD-PW2) application startup.
Baseline Shift “-16” to “16” Sets the TD-PW mode baseline position to use on application startup.
(TD-PW)
Baseline Shift “-16” to “16” Sets the Doppler (TD-PW1) baseline position to use on application
(TD-PW1) startup.
Baseline Shift “-16” to “16” Sets the Doppler (TD-PW2) baseline position to use on application
(TD-PW2) startup.

Post Process tab

Parameter Option Description

Gamma Type “Window Type”, Sets the γ type which is applied when the application starts.
(TD-PW) “S-Curve Type”,
“Parabolic Type”,
“Linear Type”
Gamma (TD-PW) “-4.0” to “4.0” Sets the gamma value at which the application starts, in units of 0.1.
Rejection (TD-PW) “0” to “255” Configures the location of the rise of the curve.
Center (TD-PW) “0” to “255” Configures the location of the center for s-curve type curves.
Saturation (TD-PW) “0” to “255” Configures the saturation location of curves.

310 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 QSS Presets

Area tab

Parameter Option Description

Area Width (TDI) “10” to “100” Set the flow area width on application startup, in units of 5%.
NOTE: The configurable range varies depending on the probe.
Area Width (B+TDI/*) “10” to “100” Sets flow area width during B (TDI)/* mode at 5% units.
NOTE: The configurable range varies depending on the probe.
Area Height (TDI) “25” to “100” Set the flow area height at which the application starts, in units of 1%.
Area Depth (TDI) “1 (Shallow)” Set the flow area depth at which the application starts, in units of 5%.
“2 (Center)”
“3 (Deep)”

Color tab

Parameter Option Description

Gain (TDI [B]) “0” to “255” Sets Color Flow Gain (TDI) to use on application startup.
Line Density (TDI [B]) “1” to “8” Sets Line Density (TDI [B]) to use on application startup.
Line Density increases when level is raised and decreases when it is
lowered.
Line Density [HI “1” to “8” Set the Line Density to apply when HI Zoom (TDI Mode) starts.
Zoom] (TDI [B])
Velocity Range (TDI) “401.04” to “0.63” Sets the velocity range for TDI mode on application startup.
NOTE: The velocity range varies depending on the probe.
Persistence “0” to “7” Configures the level of correlation processing to apply between
image frames on application startup. A “0” setting will not apply any
correlation processing.
Packet Size “Large” Lowers the frame rate but displays the color flow with a high level of
precision.
“Middle” Displays the default color flow.
“Small” This setting displays color flow with good real time performance.
The frame rate will increase but the precision will drop slightly.
Smoothing “1” to “5” Sets the level that smoothly displays the color flow.
Blend [%] “0” to “100” Configures the color transparency ratio.
When the motion speed of tissue is displayed in color, the higher the
permeability, the more translucent the color is and the easier it is to
see the B mode image behind.
Color Map “A” to “O” Sets the color map which is applied to TDI mode when the
application starts.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 311
QSS Presets

9-4-8 QSS parameters: Physiology

ECG tab

Parameter Option Description

ECG Display (B) “On”, “Off” Sets the ECG Display on B mode images on application startup.
ECG Display (Sweep) “On”, “Off” Sets the ECG Display on M mode and/or D mode on application
startup.
ECG Position “1” to “32” Sets ECG Position on application startup.
ECG Sensitivity “0” to “30” Sets ECG Sensitivity on application startup.
The display amplitude of the ECG is increased according to the
numerical value. Level “0” displays the ECG as flat.
ECG Auto Sensitivity “Off”, Sets the level for automatic compensation of ECG sensitivity.
“S”, “M”, “L” Amplitude increases sequentially through “L”, “M”, “H”.

PCG tab

Parameter Option Description

PCG Display (B) “On”, “Off” Sets the PCG Display on B mode images on application startup.
PCG Display (Sweep) “On”, “Off” Sets the PCG Display on M mode and/or D mode on application
startup.
PCG Position “1” to “32” Sets PCG Position on application startup.
PCG Sensitivity “0” to “30” Sets PCG Sensitivity on application startup.
The display amplitude of the PCG is increased according to the
numerical value. Level “0” displays the PCG as flat.

Resp. tab

Parameter Option Description

Resp Display (B) “On”, “Off” Sets the Resp Display on B mode images on application startup.
Resp Display (Sweep) “On”, “Off” Sets the Resp Display on M mode and/or D mode on application
startup.
Resp Position “1” to “32” Sets Resp Position on application startup.
Resp Sensitivity “0” to “30” Sets Resp Sensitivity on application startup.
The display amplitude of the breathing is increased according to the
numerical value. Level “0” displays the breathing as flat.

312 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 QSS Presets

AUIX tab

Parameter Option Description

Pulse Display (B) “On”, “Off” Sets the Pulse Display on B mode images on application startup.
Pulse Display (Sweep) “On”, “Off” Sets the Pulse Display on M mode and/or D mode on application
startup.
Pulse Position “1” to “32” Sets Pulse Position on application startup.
Pulse Sensitivity “0” to “30” Sets Pulse Sensitivity on application startup.
The display amplitude of the pulse is increased according to the
numerical value. Level “0” displays the pulse wave as flat.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 313
Region Data Setting

9-5 Region Data Setting

1 Press the [Probe/Preset] key.

2 Select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

3 Select “Region”.

Display Example An application preset consists of an application list, information, and various buttons.
This screen can be used in the following ways:

Description
(1) Editing Application Parameters
(2) Copying, Pasting, and Deleting Applications
(3) Changing Application Names
(4) Initializing Applications (resetting to factory default settings)

314 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Region Data Setting

9-5-1 Copying diagnostic field settings

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select “Region”.

3 Select the diagnostic field to copy from the Region column.

4 Select [Copy].

5 Select the diagnostic field to copy from “User1” to “User9” of the Region column.

6 Select [Paste].

7 Select [OK] on the message.

 The selected diagnostic field will be overwritten.

9-5-2 Changing diagnostic field settings

Changing the name of the user settings.

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select “Region”.

3 Select the target diagnostic field from “User1” to “User9” of the Region column.
NOTE: The name of the factory default diagnostic field cannot be changed.

4 Enter the name.

a Select [Edit Name] and input a name.

b Press the [Enter] key.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 315
Region Data Setting

9-5-3 Initialize the diagnostic field settings

This will reset diagnosis field settings to their factory shipment default.

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select “Region”.

3 Select target applications from the Region column.

4 Select [Factory Data].

5 Select [OK] on the message.

 This will reset to the factory default settings. In the user definition Color Map, this will return the
Color Map of the copy source to its factory default settings. However, the name will not be changed.

316 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Region Data Setting

9-5-4 Editing the diagnostic field settings parameters

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select “Region”.

3 Select the target diagnostic field from the Region column.

4 Select the target category from the Menu column.

Menu Categories

Item Contents Reference

General Configures parameters not classified below
B B mode-related settings
Doppler D mode-related settings
Color CF mode-related settings
Tissue Dop. TDI mode-related settings
Body Mark Body Mark menu settings
Annotation Annotation related settings
Physiology Settings related to physiological signals
PinP PinP related settings
RVS RVS related settings RVS Section

5 Select a tab.

6 Edit the parameters.

Initializing Display tab parameters
Select [Initialize]. This changes only the parameters in the Display tab to their factory default settings.

7 Select [Save] to save settings.

8 Select [Close] to return to the examination screen.

If the following message is displayed: “Save changes to preset data?”
Select [Yes] to store changes.

Select [No] to close preset screen without saving changes.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 317
Region Data Setting

9-5-5 Diagnostic Field Settings Parameters: General

Operation tab

Sound Select
Parameter Option Description
Sound Select “Off” Sets the sounds when operating keys on the operation panel.
(Panel Switch) “A”, “B”, “C”
Sound Select “Off” Sets the sound of the touch panel.
(Touch Panel Menu) “A”, “B”, “C”
Sound Select “Off” Sets the sound when pressing the key that assigns archives 1 through
(Archive Switch) “A”, “B”, “C” 5 among the operation panel keys.
Sound of Store “On”, “Off” Sets the sound to go off when a still image or moving image has
been saved.

Parameter Option Description

Trackball Priority “Search” Sets the trackball function when the [Freeze/B Gain] key is set to ON.
When Frozen “Body Mark”
(Color Off) “Comment”
“Measurement +
Search”
Trackball Priority “Search” Sets the trackball function when the [Freeze/B Gain] key is set to ON
When Frozen “Body Mark” in CF mode, PD mode, TDI mode, eFlow, Elastography and CHI-Color.
(Color On) “Comment”
“Measurement +
Search”
Trackball Priority “On” Sets the Focus Position to be movable with trackball on application
(Focus) “Off” startup.
ZoomROI re-display “On”, “Off” While in HI Zoom mode, use the trackball to display the image at its
by Trackball original dimensions and enable movement of the ROI.
B Gain Encoder on “Cine Search” Sets the functions of the [Freeze/B Gain] key (rotary encoder) when
Frozen “B Gain” the [Freeze/B Gain] key is ON.
Message Alarm “On”, “Off” Enables the sounds when messages are displayed.
Monitor/Panel “Type A” Sets the Monitor/Panel Setup which is applied when the application
Setting “Type B” starts.
“Type C”
Velocity/Focus “Velocity” Sets the [FOCUS/VELOCITY] paddle switch functions on application
Paddle Switch “Focus” startup.
“Dependent Mode”
B Active by Cursor “On”, “Off” This setting makes the B mode image become active by moving the
Movement cursor when an M mode or D mode image is active in B/M or B/D
mode.

318 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Region Data Setting

Display tab

Parameter Option Description

ID Input Type “ID Name” Sets the ID Input Type when pressing the [New Patient] key.
“ID Obstetrics”
“ID Gynecology”
“ID BSA”
“ID Urology”
“ID BMI”
Menu Skin Select “A” Configures a high level of brightness on the touch panel menu.
“B” Configures a moderate level of brightness on the touch panel menu.
“C” Configures a low level of brightness on the touch panel menu.
Pointer Home “Review Area” Configures the display of the pointer in the thumbnail area when
Position pressing the [Pointer] key.
“Comment Area” Configures the display of the pointer in the comment area when
pressing the [Pointer] key.
“Previous Position” When the [Pointer] key is pressed, the pointer is displayed in the
comment area at initial startup and pointer is displayed in the area
where pointer display ended the previous time when redisplayed.
TI Display “TIS”, “TIB”, “TIC” Configures the thermal index display items.
B/D Format “L/R” Configures the display to left/right when in B/D mode.
“U/D” Configures the display to upper/lower when in B/D mode.
B/M Format “L/R” Configures the display to left/right when in B/M mode.
“U/D” Configures the display to upper/lower when in B/M mode.
B/D Format Size “Normal” Configures the B mode image and D mode division size when B/D
(U/D) “Wide” Format is “U/D”.In Normal, B: D=1:1, in Wide, B: D=1: 2.
B/M Format Size “Normal” Configures the B mode image and M mode division size when B/M
(U/D) “Wide” Format is “U/D”.In Normal, B: M=1:1, in Wide, B: M=1: 2.
Font Size (Meas. “×1”, “×1.2”, “×1.4” Configures the character size of the measurement result display.
Results)
Velocity Unit “cm/s”, “m/s” Sets the velocity range display unit on application startup.
“kHz”
Joining display of 2B “On”, “Off” When the left/right display conditions are the same, this setting
allows the joint display of 2 images when in the dual screen mode.
NOTE: Only supported by linear probes.

NOTE:When using Trapezoid, Vertical Shift, CHI and/or Zoom,

images cannot be displayed jointly on 2 screens.
Cut-off freq. of Wall “On”, “Off” Sets the display of PW waveform and CW waveform cutoff frequency
Filter (displayed in B/D mode)

Cine tab

Parameter Option Description

Cine Memory “Off” Sets the Cine Memory Division to use on application startup.
Division “2”, “4”

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 319
Region Data Setting

Filling tab

Parameter Option Description

Filing “Abdomen”, Sets the Filing Presets associated with applications.
“Obstetric”,
“Gynecology”,
“Cardiology”,
“Vascular”,
“Small Parts”,
“Urology”,
“User 1” to “User 9”

320 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Region Data Setting

9-5-6 Diagnostic Field Settings Parameters: B

B tab

Parameter Option Description

Initial Mode “B” Sets the display range for B mode display images on application
“Dual” startup.
“Quad”
B Format Size (H) “Normal” Sets the height of a B mode image or M mode image displayed on B,
“Small” B/B, B/M or B/D mode.
Rotary Plane Mark “On”, “Off” Configures the Rotary Plane Mark Display on application startup (only
Display for the corresponding probes).
Rotary Plane Angle “On”, “Off” Configures the Rotary Plane Angle Display on application startup
Display (only for the corresponding probes).
Invert L/R “On”, “Off” Sets the L/R Invert on B mode images on application startup.
Invert U/L “On”, “Off” Sets the U/L Invert on B mode images on application startup.
TGC “Fixed” It is adjusted always at a constant ratio to a display depth.
Changes the adjustable range of TGC equally for an image display
range.
“Variable” Sets the depth for dividing the screen display into equal parts during
TGC on application startup.
TGC Curve “Normal” Configures TGC to use the memorized curve on application startup.
“Custom”
Image Rotation “0” Sets the orientation (clockwise rotation angle) for B mode images on
“90” application startup.
“180”
“270”
Omni Plane Angle “-75” to “75” Sets the Omni Plane Angle on application startup (only for probes for
Setting the corresponding Omni Planes).
NOTE: The maximum angle value varies depending on the probe.
Omni Plane Mark “On”, “Off” Sets the Omni Plane Mark Display on application startup (only for
Display probes for the corresponding Omni Planes).
Omni Plane Angle “On”, “Off” Sets the Omni Plane Angle Display on application startup (only for
Display probes for the corresponding Omni Planes).
Line Correlation “On”, “Off” Runs correlation of scan lines and smooths out the image.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 321
Region Data Setting

Biplane tab

Parameter Option Description

Invert L/R [L] “On”, “Off” Sets the L/R Invert for B mode vertical section images on application
startup with a 1-connector biplane connection.
Invert L/R [T] “On”, “Off” Sets the L/R Invert for B mode lateral section images on application
startup with a 1-connector biplane connection.
Invert U/L [L] “On”, “Off” Sets the U/L Invert for B mode vertical section images on application
startup with a 1-connector biplane connection.
Invert U/L [T] “On”, “Off” Sets the U/L Invert for B mode lateral section images on application
startup with a 1-connector biplane connection.
Image Rotation [L] “0” Sets the rotation for B mode vertical section images on application
“90” startup with a 1-connector biplane connection.
“180”
“270”
Image Rotation [T] “0” Sets the rotation for B mode lateral section images on application
“90” startup with a 1-connector biplane connection.
“180”
“270”
Initial Plane “T” Sets the biplane cross-sectional area display at application startup.
“L” “Previous exam” shows the cross-sectional area displayed at the end
“Previous exam” of the previous exam.
NOTE: The CC41R and the CC41R1 display transverse sections
regardless of the “Previous exam” setting.

322 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Region Data Setting

9-5-7 Diagnostic Field Settings Parameters: Doppler

Common tab

Parameter Option Description

Simultaneous (PW) “On”, “Off” Sets the display range for B/D simultaneous display images on
application startup.
Simultaneous “On”, “Off” Sets to display a smoother PW waveform when under simultaneous
Smoothing operation.
Direct to PW Sweep “B+Cursor” Configures the display of the cursor on B mode images (single
“B/PW” screen) during B/PW mode startup.
Spectrum Format “Normal” Configures the D mode image display area height for B/D mode
Size “Wide” during application startup.
Invert Axis (D) “Base Line” Configures the spectrum inversion standard on application startup.
“Center”
Invert Link “On”, “Off” Configures the color polarity during spectrum inversion.
B Shift “On”, “Off” Sets the B mode image to follow the cursor movement in the B/D
mode.
Cursor Position “Left” Sets the transmission position in CW mode of a linear and convex
(LN/CV CW) “Center” probe.
“Right”
Spectrum Texture “Smooth” Sets the sensitivity of the Doppler waveform.
“Sharp”

Angle Bar tab

Parameter Option Description

Angle Correction “Keep an angle on Configures the Angle Correction bar to run when the D cursor has
Type screen” been moved.
“Keep an angle with “Keep an angle on screen” maintains the angle on the screen.
Doppler cursor” “Keep an angle with Doppler cursor” maintains the angle with the D
cursor.
Automatic Reverse “On”, “Off” Configures the Angle Correction bar to invert at the same time as the
D cursor steer angle inverts.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 323
Region Data Setting

9-5-8 Diagnostic Field Settings Parameters: Color

Common tab

Parameter Option Description

Velocity Unit (PD) “On”, “Off” Configures the display of velocity range units (kHz in PD and eFlow)
on eFlow or PD mode startup.
Invert Color Map “On”, “Off” Sets the color polarity inversion on application startup.
Line Density Offset “-7”, “-6”, “-5”, “-4”, “-3”, Adjusts the scan line density during Triplex for scan line density set
(Triplex) “-2”, “-1” “0” using Line Density (Color).

9-5-9 Diagnostic Field Settings Parameters: Tissue Dop.

Common tab

Parameter Option Description

Invert Axis (TD-PW) “Base Line” Configures the spectrum inversion standard on application startup.
“Center”
Invert Color Map “On”, “Off” Sets the color polarity inversion on application startup.
Spectrum Texture “Smooth” Sets the sensitivity of the Doppler waveform.
“Sharp”

324 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Region Data Setting

9-5-10 Diagnostic Field Settings Parameters: Body Mark

US tab

Parameter Option Description

Body Mark Display “On”, “Off” Sets the Body Mark Display on application startup.
Body Mark Copy “On”, “Off” A setting that inherits the body marks in the active screen when the
active screen is switched in dual or quad screen display.
Probe Mark Copy “On”, “Off” A setting that inherits the type, position and angle of probe marks in
the active screen when the active screen is switched in dual or quad
screen display.

RVS tab

Parameter Option Description

Body Mark Display “On”, “Off” Configures the display of body marks on US images.
3D Body Mark “On”, “Off” Configures the display of body marks on virtual images.
Display

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 325
Region Data Setting

9-5-11 Diagnostic Field Settings Parameters: Annotation

Common tab

Parameter Option Description

Dictionary “Dic1” to “Dic28” Configures the user dictionary to display during comment input.
Comment Menu “Annotation” Configures the menu to be displayed on the touch panel during
“Annotation + comment input.
Keyboard”
“Virtual Keyboard”
Character Size “Small” Configures the character size.
“Middle”
“Large”
Annotation “Full Spelling” Configures the words to be entered into the Dictionary.
Dictionary Select “Abbreviation” Choose to input the full spelling and/or acronyms.
Comment Auto “Erase” Configures comments to be displayed/not displayed when freezing is
Delete “Remain” canceled.
“Erase” configures comments to not be displayed, while “Remain”
displays them to be displayed.
Comment Cursor “Home Position” Set cursor display position when the Pointer Home Position of preset
Position “Previous Position” ([Preset Setup > Region > General > Display]) is “Comment Area”.
Replace Mode “On”, “Off” Sets replacement mode use when entering comments.
Search Words “On”, “Off” Sets registered word search during key entry.

326 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Region Data Setting

9-5-12 Diagnostic Field Settings Parameters: Physiology

Common tab

Parameter Option Description

ECG Filter “On”, “Off” Sets the use of the ECG Filter on application startup.
Invert ECG Display “On”, “Off” Sets U/L Invert of the ECG wave form on application startup.
R-Wave Beep “On”, “Off” Turns on the R-wave detection sound.
Resp Scroll Display “On”, “Off” Sets the Resp Display during freeze to scroll (waveform) when Resp
(Freeze) Display Method is a “Bar”.
Resp Display Method “Scroll”, “Bar” Sets the Resp Display Method on application startup.
PCG Filter “L”, “M”, “H” Sets the use of the PCG Filter on application startup.
R-Delay Time [s] “0.00” to “2.55” Sets the time phase to time (0.01 seconds step) from the R wave.

[Link] tab

Parameter Option Description

RRp/RRpp “0.05” to “0.50” Configures the allowable variation range between the latest and
previous R-wave intervals in steps of 0.05.
TIP: If RRp/RRpp is within the allowable variation range, that sector
is judged to be a stable heartbeat sector.
H.R. Stability Display “On”, “Off” Configures the determination and display of a stable heartbeat on
application startup.
H.R. Stability Display “0” to “50” Configures the allowable range (%) relative to the average heart rate
(Average) over the latest four heartbeats.
H.R. Stability Display “0” to “50” Configures the allowable range (%) relative to the rate of change
(Continuous) between two consecutive heartbeats.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 327
Region Data Setting

9-5-13 Diagnostic Field Settings Parameters: PinP

Common tab

Parameter Option Description

Initial Display Size “Small” Sets the display size of the PinP window on application startup.
“Half”
“Full”
Initial Display “Upper Left” Sets the display location of the PinP window on application startup.
Location “Lower Left”
“Upper Right”
“Lower Right”

328 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Input Devices

9-6 Input Devices

Input Devices are presets for assigning functions to switches and menus. The following Input Devices
are available.

Item Description
Direct SW Assigning functions to touch panel direct switch.
Refer to "Direct Switch" under "Menus" in this guide for more information on
assigning functions.
Function SW Assigning functions to the touch panel function menu.
Refer to "Function Menu: Excluding Find/Tile" under "Menus" in this guide for more
information on assigning functions.
Find/Tile View Menu Assigning functions to Find/Tile View menu.
Refer to "Function Menu: Find/Tile" under "Menus" in this guide for more information
on assigning functions.
TDI Analysis Menu Assigning functions to the function menu in TDI analysis.
Refer to the separate TDI section for more information on assigning functions.
CHI Analysis Menu Assigning functions to the function menu in CHI analysis.
Refer to the separate CHI section for more information on assigning functions.
2DTT Analysis Menu Assigning functions to the function menu in 2DTT analysis.
Refer to the separate 2DTT section for more information on assigning functions.
Custom SW Assigns functions to the keys on control panel.
Refer to "Direct Switch" under "Menus" in this guide for more information on
assigning functions.
Custom-Foot SW Assigning functions to foot switches
Custom-Keyboard SW Assigning functions to the F1 key - F12 keys of the keyboard.
NOTE: This requires use of the optional alphanumeric keyboard (EP-9165).
Measurement Menu Assigns functions to the multi rotary encoder in the measurement menu.

You can configure Input Devices to each application in order to link them to their applications.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 329
Input Devices

9-6-1 Copy/Paste Input Device

Copy input device parameters and paste to user definition.

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select “Input Device”.

3 Select the diagnostic field to copy from the Application column.

4 Select [Copy].

5 Select the diagnostic field to copy from “User1” to “User9” of the Application column.

6 Select [Paste].

7 Select [OK] on the message.

 The selected diagnostic field will be overwritten.

4
6

330 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Input Devices

9-6-2 Initializing Input Devices

This will reset Input Devices to their factory shipment default.

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select “Input Device”.

3 Select the target diagnostic field from the Application column.

4 Select [Initialize].

5 Select [OK] on the message.

 This will reset to the factory default settings. In the user definition Color Map, this will return the
Color Map of the copy source to its factory default settings. However, the name will not be changed.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 331
Input Devices

9-6-3 Changing preset names of input devices

Changing the name of the user settings.

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select “Input Device”.

3 Select the target diagnostic field from “User1” to “User9”.

NOTE: The name of the factory default diagnostic field cannot be changed.

4 Enter the name.

a Select [Edit Name].

b Enter the name.

c Press the [Enter] key.

332 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Input Devices

9-6-4 Assigning functions

This configures function assignments for switches and menus.

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select “Input Device”.

3 Select the target diagnostic field from the Application column.

4 Select an Input Device.

5 Assign the functions.

The assignment method differs depending on
the Input Device. For details, refer to the
following pages.

6 Select [Save] to save settings.

7 Select [Close] to return to the examination screen.

If the following message is displayed: “Save changes to preset data?”
Select [Yes] to store changes.

Select [No] to close preset screen without saving changes.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 333
Input Devices

Assigning to Custom Switch

NOTE: This requires use of the optional alphanumeric keyboard (EP-9165).

1
2

3 4

1 Select “Custom SW” from the Input Device list.

2 Select the switch to assign to.

3 Select the target mode from the Mode column.

4 Select the functions to assign from the Item column.

To Empty a Switch
Select the switch to make empty and then select [Delete].

334 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Input Devices

Assigning to Custom Keyboards

1 2

3 4

1 Select “Custom-Keyboard SW” from the Input Device list.

2 Select a key (F1 to F12) to assign.

3 Select the target mode from the Mode column.

4 Select the functions to assign from the Item column.

To Empty a Switch
Select the key to make empty and then select [Delete].

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 335
Input Devices

Assigning to Direct Switch

2 3 4

1 Select “Direct SW” from the Input Device list.

2 Select the location you'd like to assign.

There are three pages for direct switches you can
assign. Select [<<] or [>>] to switch pages.

3 Select the target mode from the Mode column.

4 Select the functions to assign from the Item column.

To Empty a Location
Select the location to make empty and then select [Delete].

336 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Input Devices

Assigning to the Function Menu

1
2 3

4 5

1 Select “Function SW” from the Input Device list.

2 Select a mode to assign a function from the Mode list.

3 Select a part to assign.

Function Menu Arrow
This indicates the direction of the multi rotary encoder of the menu below the arrow.

4 Select the target mode from the Select Item Mode column.

5 Select the functions to assign from the Select Item column.

To Empty a Location
Select the location to make empty and then select [Delete].

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 337
Color Map

9-7 Color Map

9-7-1 Editing the contents of a Color Map

You can configure 15 types per diagnostic field. These 15 types can be combined and edited.

4
3
a

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select “ColorMap”.

3 Select the target diagnostic field from the list.

4 Select the mode from the list.

5 Editing the Color Map.

a Select the changing color map from A to O. c Select ↑.

b Select where to copy the Color Map from d Repeat steps a through c for each Color Map.
using the MasterData tab and/or the
UserCustom tab.

6 Select [Save] to save settings.

7 Select [Close] to return to the examination screen.

If the “Save changes to preset data?” message is displayed
Select [Yes] to store changes.

Select [No] to close preset screen without saving changes.

338 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Color Map

9-7-2 Combining, Copying, and Pasting Color Maps

The parameters for a Color Map can be copied and then pasted into a user definition.

4
6

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select “ColorMap”.

3 Select the diagnostic field to copy from list.

4 Select [Copy].

5 Select the diagnostic field to copy from “User1” to “User9”.

6 Select [Paste].

7 Select [OK] on the message.

 The selected diagnostic field will be overwritten.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 339
Color Map

9-7-3 Initializing Color Maps

This will reset Color Maps back to their factory shipment default.

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select “ColorMap”.

3 Select the target diagnostic field from the list.

4 Select [Factory Data].

5 Select [OK] on the message.

 This will reset to the factory default settings. In the user definition Color Map, this will return the
Color Map of the copy source to its factory default settings. However, the name will not be changed.

340 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Color Map

9-7-4 Changing color map names

Changing the name of the user settings.

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select “ColorMap”.

3 Select the target diagnostic field from “User1” to “User9”.

NOTE: The name of the factory default diagnostic field cannot be changed.

4 Enter the name.

a Select [Edit Name].

b Enter the name.

c Press the [Enter] key.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 341
Filing

9-8 Filing

This configures parameter settings related to image output and playback.

9-8-1 Editing Filing Parameters

This configures the parameters in regard to image output and play in filing. This preset is set in every
diagnosis field.

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select “Filing”.

3 Select the target diagnostic field.

4 Edit the parameters.

5 Select [Save] to save settings.

6 Select [Close] to return to the examination screen.

If the following message is displayed: “Save changes to preset data?”
Select [Yes] to store changes.

Select [No] to close preset screen without saving changes.

342 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Filing

9-8-2 Combining, Copying, and Pasting Filings

The parameters for a Filing can be copied and then pasted into a user definition.

4
6

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select “Filing”.

3 Select the diagnostic field to copy from list.

4 Select [Copy].

5 Select diagnosis domain from“User1” to “User9” of list.

6 Select [Paste].

7 Select [OK] on the message.

 The selected diagnostic field will be overwritten.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 343
Filing

9-8-3 Initializing Filings

This will reset Filings back to their factory shipment default.

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select “Filing” and then select the target diagnostic field from the list.

3 Select [Factory Data].

4 Select [OK] on the message.

 This will reset to the factory default settings. In the user definition Color Map, this will return the
Color Map of the copy source to its factory default settings. However, the name will not be changed.

9-8-4 Changing Filing Names

Changing the name of the user settings.

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select “Filing”.

3 Select the target diagnostic field from “User1” to “User9”.

NOTE: The name of the factory default diagnostic field cannot be changed.

4 Enter the name.

a Select [Edit Name].

b Input name and press the [Enter] key.

344 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Filing

9-8-5 Filing: Parameters

Common tab

Acquisition Mode

Parameter Option Description

Acquisition Mode “Pre (Time)” Sets the moving image acquisition method on application startup.
“Pre (ECG)”
“Post (Time)”
“Post (ECG)”
“Manual”
ECG Cycle “1” to “10” Configures the Cine playback range and moving image acquisition
time after freezing according to the heart rate.
Time Cycle “1” to “16”, Configures the Cine playback range and moving image acquisition
“30”, “45”, “60”, time (seconds) after freezing.
“75”, “90”

Store

Parameter Option Description

Store Media “HDD” Configures where to acquire the moving or still image from.
“USB”
“CD-R Buffer”
“DVD”
“NET (DICOM)”
Data Format (Still) “Raw+RGB” Sets the Data Format (still) on application startup.
“RGB”
Data Format (Movie) “Raw+RGB” Sets the Data Format (movie) on application startup.
“Video Clip”
Format Type (Still) “DICOM” Configures the save format when saving still images to a media other
“JPEG” than the instrument hard disk.
“BMP”
“TIFF”

Video Clip Setting

Parameter Option Description

Video Clip Setting “1024×768/30” Configures the playback speed and image size when saving video
“800×600/60” clips.
“800×600/30”
“640×480/60”
“640×480/30”
Video Clip Auto Stop “On”, “Off” Configures the examination screen after saving a video clip to freeze.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 345
Filing

Playback Mode

Parameter Option Description

Playback Mode “Short” Configures the synchronization for moving image playback when in
“Long” dual or quad screens.
“Align”
“Free Run”
Playback Speed Unit “Frame Rate” Setting the playback speed units. Make “Ratio”×1 during frame rate
“Ratio” import.
Loop Mode (Img “ECG Sync” Configures the synchronization for moving image playback when
Compare) “Free Run” Image Compare display.
Auto Playback “On”, “Off” Configures the loop playback for after acquiring a moving image.

Send to Net

Parameter Option Description

Convert to Video Clip “On”, “Off” Sets the selected image to be automatically converted to a Video Clip
and transferred to the network server when a Tile image is displayed.

346 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Filing

Teaching File tab

Teaching File (Video)

Parameter Option Description

Teaching File (Video “On”, “Off” Configures the mask for patient data (patient ID, patient name)
Clip) related to the output image when recording a video clip or to an
external media.

Masking Item
Parameter Option Description
Hosp. & Sonographer “On”, “Off” Configures the mask for hospital name and sonographer name
Name related to the output image when recording a video clip or to an
external media.
Age “On”, “Off” Configures the mask for patient age related to the output image
when recording a video clip or to an external media.
Sex “On”, “Off” Configures the mask for patient sex related to the output image
when recording a video clip or to an external media.

Teaching File (Net)

Parameter Option Description

Teaching File (Net) “On”, “Off” Masks patient data (patient ID and name) in images output in a
transfer of images to a network.

Masking Item
Parameter Option Description
Hosp. & Sonographer “On”, “Off” Masks the name of the hospital and the sonographer in images
Name output in a transfer of images to a network.
Age “On”, “Off” Masks the age of a patient in images output in a transfer of images to
a network.
Sex “On”, “Off” Masks the sex of a patient in images output in a transfer of images to
a network.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 347
Dictionary

9-9 Dictionary

Configures the user dictionary and system dictionary.

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select “Dictionary”.

3 Changing the dictionary settings.

Registering words into a dictionary

Select [Registration] and register words in the screen that opens.

NOTE: Refer to "Registering a Word in the Menu Format to a User Dictionary" and "Registering a Word in the Line
Format to a User Dictionary" elsewhere in this volume.

Changing the Dictionary Name

Enter a name of up to 8 characters into the Dictionary Name column (figure below (1)). You can only use
alphabet or numbers.

Configuring Joint Use of the System Dictionary

Select the button (figure below(2)) for the System Dictionary that responds to the dictionary number.

 Not Use: Use only the user dictionary.

 Use: Combine the user dictionary and system

dictionary.

(1) (2)

4 Select [Save] to save settings.

5 Select [Close] to return to the examination screen.

348 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Dictionary

If the “Save changes to preset data?” message is displayed

Select [Yes] to store changes.

Select [No] to close preset screen without saving changes.

Reference Registering a Word in the Menu Format to a User Dictionary → p.32

information Registering a Word in the List Format to a User Dictionary → p.34

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 349
Loading Presets and Backing-Up

9-10 Loading Presets and Backing-Up

Importing preset backup creation and presets from backup.

There are many parameters in the instrument presets. You can create a backup of these parameters in a
batch or by category. You can also import a backup that you have created onto the instrument.
Imported and backed up image data is processes as follows.

 SystemPreset

 Application Menu + Q.S.S

 Application Menu

 Q.S.S

 Region Data Setting

 Measurement

 Filing

 Input Device

 Body Mark (Bitmap): User created Bitmap data (imported data only)

 Annotation

 Color Map Setting (B/M/D)

 Color Map Setting (Others)

 Color Map (Bitmap): User created Bitmap data (imported data only)

350 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Loading Presets and Backing-Up

9-10-1 Importing Chosen Data

This will import designated data into the device.

Preliminary check Connect the target media. Alternatively, insert a DVD.

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select [Preset Control].

TIP: The [Preset Control] is present on all preset screens.

3 Select the target data from list.

4 Select the folder to import into.

a Select the target media.

b Select [Import].

c Select a folder.

d Select [OK].

5 Select the data to load from the Media list.

6 Select [→].

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 351
Loading Presets and Backing-Up

9-10-2 Exporting Designated Data

This will export designated data from the device.

Preliminary check Connect the target media. Alternatively, insert a DVD.

4
3

10

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select [Preset Control].

TIP: The [Preset Control] is present on all preset screens.

3 Select [Export].

4 Select the target data from list.

5 Select the storage media.

6 Select the data to load from the US list.

7 Select [←].
 The data will be temporarily stored.

8 Repeat steps 2 - 5 for each target data.

9 Confirm the temporary data.

10 Select [Save to Media].

 The temporary data is stored into the specified medium.

352 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Loading Presets and Backing-Up

9-10-3 Create a Backup

This will create a backup of all preset data.

Preliminary check Connect the target media. Alternatively, insert a DVD.

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select [Preset Control].

TIP: There are [Preset Control] in all of the preset screens.

3 Select the storage media.

4 Select [Full Backup/Restore].

 A dialog box is displayed.

5 Select [Full Backup] from the dialog.

 A backup file for all preset data will be created. The backup files will be stored on folder name
“device name_v version name_device serial number_YYYY_MMDD_HHMMSS”.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 353
Loading Presets and Backing-Up

9-10-4 Restoring Backup Data

This will restore backup data to the instrument.

Preliminary check Connect the target media. Alternatively, insert a DVD.

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select [Preset Control].

TIP: There are [Preset Control] in all of the preset screens.

3 Selects the media device for uploading.

4 Select [Full Backup/Restore].

 A dialog box is displayed.

5 Select [Restore] from the dialog.

6 Select the backup data from list.

7 Select [OK].
 The message: “Preset settings updated. System will reboot to reflect the setting changes.” will be
displayed.

354 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Loading Presets and Backing-Up

8 Select [Yes].
 The message: “Do you want to restore the network setting from backuped data? Current data will
be Overwrite.” will be displayed.

9 Select copy from the network settings.

Network Settings Data
DICOM categories within the system presets are applicable.

 [Yes]: All the data including the network

settings will be copied.

 [No]: All data except for the network settings

will be copied.

 The data will be restored to the device.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 355
User management

9-11 User management

Limit users of the instrument to only registered users, and manage and protect the patient data and
instrument settings.
Patient data can be protected by limiting the authorized control of the instrument. There are three levels
of user access rights, and you can maintain the current device presets, etc.
Using the presets, you can register and delete users, as well as change the type of access they have.
If user authentication is turned on, the user management presets are limited to users with Level 1 access
permissions. User name and password are necessary to display the user management screen.
Table 1: Access permissions and contents
Access permissions Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

User management
• Settings for user authentication function × ×
• User management (register, delete and change access rights)

Database Control of Patient Data ×

Change Parameters (including measurement) of Presets ×

Change Login Password

Other controls

356 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 User management

9-11-1 Configuring the User Authentication

This configures the login screen display upon booting up the instrument.

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select [User Admin].

If the Login Screen is Displayed
Input user name and password and select [OK].

3 Configure the User Authentication.

 “On”

Configuring user authentication. On the next

start-up, the login screen is displayed.

 “Off”

Removing user authentication. On the next

start-up, the login screen is not displayed.
The authorized controls based on access
permissions are also removed.

4 Select [OK] on the message.

 Settings will take effect starting from the next time the instrument is booted up.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 357
User management

9-11-2 Registering a User

This will register a user to the instrument.

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select [User Admin].

If the Login Screen is Displayed
Input user name and password and select [OK].

3 Select [Add User].

4 Configure the user name and access rights.

a Enter a user name with up to 16 1-byte
alphanumeric characters. 3
b Select the access permissions.

c Select [OK].
 The user will be registered.
4a
The newly registered user password will be 4b
configured during the initial login.
4c

358 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 User management

Setting the password

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select [User Admin].

3 Select [Password] from the login screen.

Left: Login screen, right: Password change screen

4 Input the user name and current password.

NOTE: If this is the first login after registering a user, leave the password blank.

5 Enter an new password with up to 16 alphanumeric characters.

6 Type in the new password again.

7 Select [OK].

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 359
User management

9-11-3 Editing a registered user

This will change the access permissions of a registered user. Alternatively, you can delete a user.

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select [User Admin].

If the Login Screen is Displayed
Input user name and password and select [OK].

3 Select a user.

4 Edit the user.

Changing Access Permissions

a Select [Access Control].

b Change access permissions in the dialog.

c Select [OK].

Deleting a User

a Select [Delete User].

b Select [Yes] on the message.

360 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 User management

9-11-4 Outputting user list

This will output the registered user and its access permissions in a CSV file.

Preliminary check Connect a USB to the media.

1 Push the [Probe/Preset] key and select [Preset Setup] on the touch panel.

2 Select [User Admin].

If the Login Screen is Displayed
Input user name and password and select [OK].

3 Select a [User list].

 Output the user name and access permissions list as a CSV file to the USB.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 Presets | 361
User management

362 | Presets ©Hitachi, Ltd.

MN1-5881 rev.14
 Recycling or Disposal

Recycle or dispose of this equipment properly according to your organizational rules and your
local laws.

This symbol on the equipment or on its packaging indicates that this equipment shall not be
treated as household waste. Instead it shall be handed over to the applicable collection point
for the recycling of electrical and electronic products. By ensuring this equipment is disposed
of correctly, you will help prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and
human health, which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste handling of this
equipment. The recycling of materials will help to conserve natural resources.

The equipment contains a primary battery (lithium battery). You should recycle or dispose of this
equipment properly according to your organizational rules and your local laws. For more detailed
information about recycling of this equipment, please contact one of our offices as listed on the back
cover, or your household waste disposal service.

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 | 363
 Manufacturer
Hitachi, Ltd.
2-16-1, Higashi-Ueno, Taito-ku, Tokyo, 110-0015, Japan
Contact
+81-3-6284-3668
[Link]

Hitachi Medical Systems GmbH

Otto-von-Guericke-Ring 3
D-65205 Wiesbaden, Germany
“EC REP” means the name and address of the authorized representative in the
European Community.

Revision : 14
Created date : 2018.3.16

©Hitachi, Ltd.
MN1-5881 rev.14 050300 20180316